Specifications Manual Book Two

Specifications Manual Book Two

January 8, 2016

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S – Volume Two

___________________________________________________________________________________

Additions & Renovations

Newark United Methodist Church

69 East Main Street

Newark, DE 19711

Architect:

Daley + Jalboot Architects

Philadelphia, Pennsylvania

215-564-5222

Electrical & Plumbing Engineer:

Schiller & Hersh Associates

Oreland, Pennsylvania

215-886-8947

DJA #1397

Structural Engineer:

Larsen & Landis Engineers

Philadelphia, Pennsylvania

215-232-7207

Table of Contents – Volume 2

DJA #1397

Additions & Renovations

Newark United Methodist Church - 2016

69 East Main Street

Newark, DE 19711

SPECIFICATION NOTES:

232113

232300

233113

233300

233423

233713

238126

238127

238219

238228

238233

238236

1. These Specifications provide quality and product information related to the scope of work as shown in the

Construction Document Drawings.

2. These Specifications are not all inclusive of the scope of work on the project. They do not represent all of the trades required to complete the project.

3. See Architectural & Structural drawings for location, scope of work, and additional specification information.

See Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical Drawings for schedules and details.

SPECIFICATION VOLUME 2:

FIRE PROTECTION

210000

210500

210533

211313

SUMMARY OF WORK

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION

HEAT TRACING FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PLUMBING

220000

220500

221119

221316

224000

SUMMARY OF WORK

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PLUMBING FIXTURES

MECHANICAL

230000

230500

230513

SUMMARY OF WORK

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230523

230529

230593

230700

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

HVAC INSULATION

HYDRONIC PIPING

REFRIGERANT PIPING

METAL DUCTS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS

FAN COIL UNITS

RADIANT CEILING PANELS

CONVECTORS

ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS

ELECTRICAL

260000 SUMMARY OF WORK

260500

260519

260526

260529

260533

260553

260923

262416

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PANELBOARDS

265100

271500

281300

283111

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

SECURITY CAMERAS AND VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

DIGITAL, ADDRESSIBLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

END OF VOLUME 2

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS FIRE PROTECTION SUMMARY OF WORK

# 1397 Section 210000 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Divisions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

B. The requirements of all other sections of Division 21 apply to this section.

DEFINITIONS

A. For a complete list of definitions for this contract refer to the Division 1 specifications.

B. Provide: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

1.3

C. Install: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

SCOPE OF WORK

A. The following description of work will use the following abbreviations:

1.

2.

3.

General Contractor – GC

Electrical Contractor – EC

Fire Protection Contractor - FC

B. Work Included: It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings that the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified herein, furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary, together with the necessary accessories to constitute a satisfactory and complete installation, to complete the installation of the mechanical work, as indicated on the drawings and described hereinafter. The

Contractor shall properly install, equip, adjust and put in perfect condition, the respective portions of the work specified, and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work to form a complete and properly operating whole.

C. Refer to contract drawings FP001 and FP101 for requirements. General Contract Requirements are as follows:

1. Construction phasing and sequencing: a. Working hours and days: Refer to the Division 0 and 1 specifications all requirements.

2. For detailed scope of work for sprinkler and sprinkler support requirements, refer to the respective

Division 21 specification sections.

3. Provide all new work as outlined in the contract drawings and specification in accordance with

NFPA-13-2010 and local code requirements.

4. Provide and install listed heat tracing system for sprinkler piping in Vestibule A150. Insulate heat traced sprinkler piping and provide hard PVC cover over insulation suitable for painting.

5.

6.

Providing all necessary permits, approvals, fees, etc.

Provide instructions to the owner as outlined in these Specifications.

7. Provide all cutting and patching as required to perform the work of this contract.

8. Provide all necessary rigging as required to perform the work of this contract.

FIRE PROTECTION SUMMARY

OF WORK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 210000 – page 2 # 1397

9. Provide manufacturer startup for all systems specified as outlined in these Specifications.

10. Provide removal of trash and general clean-up.

11. Provide as-built drawings.

12. Provide operation and maintenance manuals.

13. Employ the services of the local Underwriters' Inspection Agency and pay for all associated fees.

14. Completion Date: All fire protection work shall be completed on the date of substantial completion for the project as set in the Division 1 specifications.

D. The work shall include all materials, equipment and systems shown on the drawings and work for other

Divisions required to complete all the work ready for operation.

E. The Contractor shall provide all labor, material, equipment and services for the complete and proper installation and operation of the electrical work as indicated, required or implied by the drawings and as specified herein.

F. All of the specifications listed and all of the drawings listed are part of the Contract Documents of the

Contractor. The Contractor shall review all drawings and specification divisions to determine the full scope of his work.

G. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine all Drawings (Architectural, Structural,

Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing) to determine the full extent of the work. All field measurements and verifications of conditions and materials will be the obligation of the Contractor. The submission of a

Proposal by the Contractor will be considered an indication that all work, in compliance with these specifications and the drawings, has been included in the Proposal. It will also be considered an indication that a thorough review of conditions, materials, and all related specifications have been investigated by the Contractor, and the results of such investigations have been included in the

Contractor's Proposal.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Contractors shall note that all equipment warranties, shall be for a period of 2 years including all equipment and workmanship, will begin after Substantial Completion. It will not make any difference when equipment is ordered, delivered or installed, warranties will commence after the Architect issues his letter of “Substantial Completion.”

B. All equipment is to include factory start-up unless the Contractor receives written permission, from the owner, for Contractor start-up. Copies of the start-up report must be included with the Request for Final

Payment, otherwise final payment will be withheld until the factory reports are submitted.

C. All equipment furnished for this Owner shall include a two-year warranty on parts and labor. This warranty shall supercede all notations in all the other Division 21 specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable).

END OF SECTION 210000

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

FIRE PROTECTION SUMMARY OF WORK

Section 210000 – page 3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

PART 1 - GENERAL

COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

Section 210500 – page 1

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

Mechanical sleeve seals.

Sleeves.

Escutcheons.

Grout.

Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1.

2.

Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 210500 – page 2 # 1397

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

B. Sealing Elements: EPDM links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Include two for each sealing element.

D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

Section 210500 – page 3 # 1397

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1.

2.

3.

Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 210500 – page 4 # 1397

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration

Firestopping" for materials.

O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.

Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

F.

1.

2.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.

Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

# 1397 Section 210500 – page 5

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.4 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor firesuppression materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.5 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 210500

COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR FIRE PROTECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 210500 – page 6 # 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

HEAT TRACING FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

Section 210533 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes heat tracing for fire-suppression piping with the following electric heating cables:

1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES

A. Comply with IEEE 515.1.

B. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16 AWG, tinned or nickel-coated, stranded copper bus wires embedded in crosslinked conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled, non-heating leads with connectors at one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once without overheating.

C. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.

HEAT TRACING FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

OF WORK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 210533 – page 2 # 1397

D. Cable Cover: Stainless-steel braid.

E. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F.

F. Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 185 deg F.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

H. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Maximum Heat Output: 5 W/ft.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F.

B. Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for connected cable.

C. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipe-wall temperature.

D. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer or as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with pressuresensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.

1.

2.

Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum.

Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric heating cable where indicated on plans and according to NFPA 70 and NFPA 13.

B. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed.

C. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.

D. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Section 210700 "Fire-Suppression Systems

Insulation."

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HEAT TRACING FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

# 1397 Section 210533 – page 3

E. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.

F. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

H. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

I. Connect heat-tracing controls to fire-alarm system according to NFPA 13.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1.

2.

3.

Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.

Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.

Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe-mounted cables.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables.

END OF SECTION 210533

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

PART 1 - GENERAL

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 211313 – page 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.

2.

Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through waterservice piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Light and Ordinary Hazard, Group 1

3.

4.

Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: a. b.

Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.area.

Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated.

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 211313 – page 2 # 1397

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe and wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1.

2.

Domestic water piping.

HVAC hydronic piping.

D. Qualification Data: Professional Engineer in the State of Pennsylvania.

E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for

Aboveground Piping."

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 211313 – page 3

A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1.

2.

Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Architect's written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Piping shall be black steel and shall be in accordance with NFPA-13-2007 and local authorities

B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method according to standards as required in

NFPA 13-2007.

C. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

D. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

E. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following a. Victaulic Company.

Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 211313 – page 4 # 1397

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick

1.

2.

Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with set-screws.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated, plain ends.

F.

1.

Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.

2.6 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

Calpico, Inc.

Metraflex, Inc.

Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

1.

2.

3.

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 211313 – page 5

Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.

Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.7 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

G. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

H. Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject to freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Section 210533 "Heat Tracing for Fire-Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Section 210700 "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 211313 – page 6 # 1397

I. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1.

2.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

G. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs onequarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

H. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.

Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.

Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

L. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

M. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING

A. Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler piping according to manufacturer's

"Installation Manual" and with NFPA 13 for supports.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 211313 – page 7

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

H. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

I.

1.

Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Galvanized-steel pipe

2.

3. a. b.

Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.

For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements for flashing in Division 07 Section

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions: a. b. c. d.

Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6

Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.

Exception: Sleeves are not required for water-supply tubes and waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings. sleeve seals are used.

Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls: a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 211313 – page 8 # 1397

J. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

Start and run excess-pressure pumps.

Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 211313 – page 9

A. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.

Pendent] and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 211313 – page 10 #

1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS PLUMBING SUMMARY OF WORK

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220000 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.2

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Divisions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

WARRANTY FOR PROJECT

1.3

A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a 1-year warranty on all materials, labor and systems from the date of Final Payment by the Owner.

DEFINITIONS

A. For a complete list of definitions for this contract refer to the Division 1 specifications.

B. Provide: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

1.4

C. Install: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

SCOPE OF WORK

A. The following description of work will use the following abbreviations:

1.

2.

3.

4.

General Contractor – GC

Electrical Contractor – EC

Mechanical Contractor (HVAC) – MC

Plumbing Contractor – PC

B. Work Included: It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings that the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified herein, furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary, together with the necessary accessories to constitute a satisfactory and complete installation, to complete the installation of the mechanical work, as indicated on the drawings and described hereinafter. The

Contractor shall properly install, equip, adjust and put in perfect condition, the respective portions of the work specified, and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work to form a complete and properly operating whole. The work shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following for the additions and renovations to the Newark United Methodist Church:

1. Remove plumbing fixtures at toilet rooms as indicated on plans, including but not limited to, hangers and supports. Plumbing fixtures are to be replaced with new at the same locations, provide all new supply stops, traps, wax seals, valves, insulation and water and waste piping as needed.

For detailed scope of work for each plumbing system, refer to the respective Division 22 2. specification sections.

3. Provide and install plumbing fixtures and new piping to plumbing fixtures including associated hangers, supports, fittings, valves and insulation as indicated on drawings and in specification sections.

4.

5.

Providing all necessary permits, approvals, fees, etc.

Provide instructions to the owner as outlined in these Specifications.

6. Provide all cutting and patching as required to perform the work of this contract.

PLUMBING SUMMARY OF WORK NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 2200000 - page 2 #1397

7. Provide all necessary rigging as required to perform the work of this contract.

8. Provide manufacturer startup for all systems specified as outlined in these Specifications.

9. Provide removal of trash and general clean-up.

10. Provide as-built drawings.

11. Provide operation and maintenance manuals.

12. Employ the services of the local Underwriters' Inspection Agency and pay for all associated fees.

13. Completion Date: All plumbing work shall be completed on the date of substantial completion for the project as set in the Division 1 specifications.

C. The work shall include all materials, equipment and systems shown on the drawings and work for other

Divisions required to complete all the work ready for operation.

D. The Contractor shall provide all labor, material, equipment and services for the complete and proper installation and operation of the electrical work as indicated, required or implied by the drawings and as specified herein.

E. All of the specifications listed and all of the drawings listed are part of the Contract Documents of the

Contractor. The Contractor shall review all drawings and specification divisions to determine the full scope of his work.

F. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine all Drawings (Architectural, Structural,

Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing) to determine the full extent of the work. All field measurements and verifications of conditions and materials will be the obligation of the Contractor. The submission of a

Proposal by the Contractor will be considered an indication that all work, in compliance with these specifications and the drawings, has been included in the Proposal. It will also be considered an indication that a thorough review of conditions, materials, and all related specifications have been investigated by the Contractor, and the results of such investigations have been included in the

Contractor's Proposal.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Contractors shall note that all equipment warranties, as described in the various sections of the

Specifications, will begin after Final Payment. It will not make any difference when equipment is ordered, delivered or installed, warranties will commence after Final Payment has been made.

B. All equipment is to include factory start-up unless the Contractor receives written permission, from the owner, for Contractor start-up. Copies of the start-up report must be included with the Request for Final

Payment, otherwise final payment will be withheld until the factory reports are submitted.

C. All equipment furnished for this Owner shall include a one-year warranty on parts and labor. This warranty shall supercede all notations in all the other Division 22 specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable).

END OF SECTION 220000

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS PLUMBING SUMMARY OF WORK

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220000 - page 3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220500 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

Transition fittings.

Dielectric fittings.

Sleeves.

Escutcheons.

Grout.

Plumbing demolition.

Painting and finishing.

Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1.

2.

3.

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1.

2.

EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 220500 - page 2 #1397

1.

2.

3.

4.

Transition fittings.

Dielectric fittings.

Mechanical sleeve seals.

Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding

Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1.

2.

Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section

"Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220500 - page 3

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Available Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Capitol Manufacturing Co.

Central Plastics Company.

Eclipse, Inc.

Epco Sales, Inc.

Hart Industries, International, Inc.

Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Available Manufacturers: a. b.

Calpico, Inc.

Lochinvar Corp.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Available Manufacturers: a. b. c.

Perfection Corp.

Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 220500 - page 4 #1397 d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

D. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220500 - page 5

1.

2.

3.

Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure

Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 220500 - page 6 #1397

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

Existing Piping: Use the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.

Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1.

2.

3.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220500 - page 7 a. b. c.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to

2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

4.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration

Firestopping" for materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.

Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1.

2.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1.

2.

Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 220500 - page 8 #1397

3.

4.

Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior

Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 220500

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 220500 - page 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 221116 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Specialty valves.

Flexible connectors.

Escutcheons.

Sleeves and sleeve seals.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Specialty valves.

Transition fittings.

Dielectric fittings.

Flexible connectors.

Escutcheons.

Sleeves and sleeve seals.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 221116 - page 2 #1397

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1.

2.

Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1.

2.

Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1.

2.

3.

Same size as pipes to be joined.

Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 221116 – page 3

B. Dielectric Unions:

1.

2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

Capitol Manufacturing Company.

Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

Description: a. b.

Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F.

End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. a. b. c. d. a. b.

Calpico, Inc.

Lochinvar Corporation.

Description:

Galvanized-steel coupling.

Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

End Connections: Female threaded.

Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

Flexicraft Industries.

Metraflex, Inc.

Unaflex, Inc.

Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wirebraid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1.

2.

3.

Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 221116 - page 4 #1397

C. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, setscrew or spring clips.

D. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.8 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.

C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.9 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

Calpico, Inc.

Metraflex, Inc.

Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1.

2.

3.

Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.10 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

PART 3 - EXECUTION

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 221116 – page 5

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section

"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water

Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

I.

J.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

D. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

E. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 221116 - page 6 #1397

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water

Piping Specialties."

1.

2.

Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1.

2.

NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

3.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.

B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.

C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

1.

2.

Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. b. c.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 221116 – page 7

100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3.

4.

Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1.

2.

3.

NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3.9 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1.

2.

Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 221116 - page 8 #1397

3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

3.10 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

H. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07

Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.

3.11 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1.

2.

Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397 b.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 221116 – page 9

Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3.

4.

Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

Provide testing of domestic water system as required by Westtown Township or as indicated below, whichever is more stringent: a. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

Open throttling valves to proper setting.

Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 221116 - page 10 #1397

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. b.

Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. d.

Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.15 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

3.16 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1.

2.

Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller. Use butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 3 and larger.

Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 3 and larger.

Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. 3.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

END OF SECTION 221116

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 221116 – page 11

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

Section 221316 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1.

2.

3.

Pipe, tube, and fittings.

Special pipe fittings.

Encasement for underground metal piping.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1.

2.

Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 100 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 221316 – page 2 # 1397

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.

1.

2.

PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer: a. b.

Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for

Plumbing."

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

# 1397 Section 221316 – page 3

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.

D. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if

2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1.

2.

3.

H. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

I.

Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;

1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

J.

Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.

1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 221316 – page 4 # 1397

2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1.

2.

Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. b. c.

100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3.

4.

Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1.

2.

3.

NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

NPS 4: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 4 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1.

2.

3.

Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

Section 221316 – page 5

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.

2.

Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION 221316

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 221316 – page 6 # 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PLUMBING FIXTURES

Section 224000 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Faucets for lavatories.

Flushometers.

Toilet seats.

Protective shielding guards.

Fixture supports.

Water closets.

Urinals.

Lavatories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

PLUMBING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 224000 – page 2 # 1397

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.

Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory faucets:

Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.

Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.

Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.

Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.

Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.

Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.

Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.

Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

1.6 WARRANTY

PLUMBING FIXTURES

Section 224000 – page 3

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. a. b. c.

Structural failures of unit shell.

Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.

Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: Three year(s) from date of Final Payment.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 12 of each type.

Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.

Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets, (LF-A):

1.

2. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. a. b. c. d. e.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Moen Chateau model

L4601 single handle lavatory faucet or an engineer approved equal:

Description: Manually operated lavatory faucet with lever handles.

Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

Finish: Polished chrome plate.

Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm.

Centers: 8 inches.

Mounting: Deck, exposed.

Valve Handle(s): Not applicable.

Inlet(s): NPS 3/8.

Spout: Rigid type.

Spout Outlet: Aerator.

Operation: Manual.

Drain: Grid.

Tempering Device: ASSE 1070 tempering valve on hot water supply.

PLUMBING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 224000 – page 4 # 1397

2.2 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats, (TS-A): a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Church Model

#9500C or approved equal. b. c. d. e. f.

Beneke, Inc.

American Standard, Inc.

Kohler, Inc.

Eljer, Inc.

2. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture. a. b. c. d. e. f.

Material: Molded, solid plastic.

Configuration: Open front without cover.

Size: Elongated.

Hinge Type: SS, self-sustaining.

Class: Standard commercial.

Color: White.

2.3 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers, (PSG-A):

1.

2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.

Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.

TRUEBRO, Inc.

Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

2.4 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Josam Company.

Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.

Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Urinal Supports:

1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

Section 224000 – page 5

2.5 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, (P-1):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide American Standard

Cadet Right Height model 2467.016 or an engineer approved equal:

2. Description Floor-mounting, tank type, bottom-outlet, vitreous-china fixture. a. Style: Flushometer valve. b.

1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.

2) Design Consumption: 1.60 gal./flush.

3) Color: White.

Toilet Seat: TS-A.

2.6 URINALS

A. Urinals, (P-2):

1. Manufacture Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

American Standard Washbrook Flowise model 6590.001 urinal or an engineer approved equal:

2. Description: Wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. a. b. c. d.

Color: White.

Outlet Size: NPS 2.

Flushometer: Sloan Royal model 186-1.0 manual flush valve.

Fixture Support: Urinal chair carrier.

2.7 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories, (P-3):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide American Standard

Lucerne model 0355.012 or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b.

Kohler Co.

Zurn, Inc.

2. Description: Wall-mounting, vitreous-china fixture. a. b. c.

Type: Wall mounted.

Size: 20-1/2 by 18-1/4 inches oval.

Faucet Hole Punching: 4” centers on countertop.

PLUMBING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 224000 – page 6 # 1397 d. e. f. g. h.

Faucet Hole Location: Top.

Pedestal: Not required.

Color: White.

Faucet: Lavatory LF-A.

Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated copper with stops. i. j.

Drain: Grid.

Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; NPS 1-1/4 thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon.

Hair Interceptor: Not required. k. l. Protective Shielding Guard(s): PSG-A. m. Fixture Support: Lavatory type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1.

2.

3.

Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.

Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.

Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

I.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

Section 224000 – page 7

Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

K. Install flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

L. Install toilet seats on water closets.

M. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

O. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

P. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1.

2.

Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

R. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22 Section "Common

Work Results for Plumbing."

S. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

PLUMBING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 224000 – page 8 # 1397

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

D. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms where applicable.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1.

2.

Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 224000

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PLUMBING FIXTURES

Section 224000 – page 9

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SUMMARY OF WORK

#1397 Section 230000 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Divisions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

B. The requirements of all other sections of Division 23 apply to this section.

WARRANTY FOR PROJECT

1.3

A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a 1-year warranty on all materials, labor and systems from the date of Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial completion will be as set in a letter issued by the Architect – no exceptions.

DEFINITIONS

A. For a complete list of definitions for this contract refer to the Division 1 specifications.

B. Provide: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

1.4

C. Install: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

SCOPE OF WORK

A. The following description of work will use the following abbreviations:

1.

2.

3.

4.

General Contractor – GC

Electrical Contractor – EC

Mechanical Contractor (HVAC) – MC

Plumbing Contractor – PC

B. Work Included: It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings that the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified herein, furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary, together with the necessary accessories to constitute a satisfactory and complete installation, to complete the installation of the mechanical work, as indicated on the drawings and described hereinafter. The

Contractor shall properly install, equip, adjust and put in perfect condition, the respective portions of the work specified, and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work to form a complete and properly operating whole. Refer to contract drawings for alternates and equipment associated with each alternate. The work shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following:

1.

2.

For detailed scope of work for each mechanical system, refer to the respective Division 23 specification sections.

Remove existing convectors and cabinet unit heaters and all associated hangers, supports, piping and ductwork to limits shown.

3. Remove existing exhaust fans and all associated hangers, supports, and ductwork to limits shown.

4. Relocate existing condensing units as shown on floor plans and remove associated refrigerant

SUMMARY OF WORK NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 230000 – page 2 #1397

5. piping.

Provide all patching of building elements required as a result of the demolition of mechanical equipment, piping, flue vent, etc.

6. Provide and install new cabinet unit heaters & convectors and associated ductwork and ductwork

7. controls as indicated on drawings and in the specifications.

Provide and install new exhaust fans and associated hangers and supports.

8. Provide and install new variable refrigerant flow system units, including but not limited to,

9. refrigerant piping, piping supports, heat pump unit roof supports, controls and wiring.

Provide and install new convector and all associated hangers, supports, insulation, hot water supply and return piping, fittings, valves, controls and wiring.

10. Provide and install new radiant ceiling panels and all associated hangers, supports, controls and wiring.

11. Provide and install new electric baseboard heaters and all associated hangers and supports.

12. Provide all piping, ductwork, & equipment insulation.

13. Provide system balancing at the completion of the project per contract specifications.

14. Provide, place and anchor all roof curbs and coordinate locations with the General Contractor.

General Contractor is responsible for flashing and creating roof penetrations.

15. Provide all hot water system drainage and refilling as required for work on drawings and specification. Contractor is not to assume that any existing valve indicated on the contract drawings or existing valve not indicated on the contract drawings will hold to isolate the system at that point.

16. Provide all associated control equipment required unless otherwise noted.

17. Providing all necessary permits, approvals, fees, etc.

18. Provide instructions to the owner as outlined in these Specifications.

19. Provide all cutting and patching as required to perform the work of this contract.

20. Provide all necessary rigging as required to perform the work of this contract.

21. Provide manufacturer startup for all systems specified as outlined in these Specifications.

22. Provide removal of trash and general clean-up.

23. Provide as-built drawings.

24. Provide a list to Owner of units and filter sizes.

25. Provide operation and maintenance manuals.

26. Contractor to ensure equipment numbering is coordinated during installation of controls.

27. Employ the services of the local Underwriters' Inspection Agency and pay for all associated fees.

28. Completion Date: All HVAC work shall be completed on the date of substantial completion for the project as set in the Division 1 specifications.

C. The work shall include all materials, equipment and systems shown on the drawings and work for other

Divisions required to complete all the work ready for operation.

D. The Contractor shall provide all labor, material, equipment and services for the complete and proper installation and operation of the electrical work as indicated, required or implied by the drawings and as specified herein.

E. All of the specifications listed and all of the drawings listed are part of the Contract Documents of the

Contractor. The Contractor shall review all drawings and specification divisions to determine the full scope of his work.

F. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine all Drawings (Architectural, Structural,

Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing) to determine the full extent of the work. All field measurements and verifications of conditions and materials will be the obligation of the Contractor. The submission of a

Proposal by the Contractor will be considered an indication that all work, in compliance with these

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SUMMARY OF WORK

#1397 Section 230000 – page 3 specifications and the drawings, has been included in the Proposal. It will also be considered an indication that a thorough review of conditions, materials, and all related specifications have been investigated by the Contractor, and the results of such investigations have been included in the

Contractor's Proposal.

G. Coordination between the Mechanical Contractor and Electrical Contractor:

1. The Electrical Contractor shall: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Receive and set the motor starters, etc. as provided by the Mechanical Contractor.

Provide power wiring, including final connection of same, from source to starters or contactors to motors.

Receive and install the wall-mounted electrical control devices, thermal switches, etc., and provide all wiring for same.

Provide all fused or unfused disconnect switches and circuit breakers not supplied as part of the HVAC system and as required by the National Electrical Code, or as shown on the drawings, or as specified.

Adjust connections to electrical motors to insure proper rotation.

Provide duct detectors and tubes to the MC for installation in the ductwork. EC shall wire and program the duct detectors and remote test stations into the fire alarm system.

2. The Mechanical Contractor will:

1.5 a. b. c.

Furnish and set all motors for equipment provided as part of the HVAC contract.

Furnish all motor starters, variable frequency drives, contactors, pushbuttons and switches for local and remote control of HVAC equipment that is not provided by the Electrical

Contractor and turn over to the Electrical Contractor for installation. Combination starters shall be furnished for individual (not attached to the equipment) and for packaged equipment regardless if specified or not in the respective sections of the specification.

Provide pre-wired control panels, including relays, switches, pilot lights, etc., all as shown and/or specified, complete with wiring to numbered terminal strips. d. e. f. g.

WARRANTY

Provide all-control wiring for all equipment, including all 120 V. controls. Only power supply connection to the equipment will be by the Electrical Contractor.

Furnish and install duct and pipe-mounted control devices, such as freezestats, aquastats, flow switches, etc.

Furnish wiring diagrams for the systems power wiring, in sufficient time to allow roughing-in of conduit in accordance with the proposed work schedule.

Receive duct detectors from the EC and install in the ductwork. MC shall provide and install all shut-down and system activation wiring from the smoke detectors to the respective units.

A. Contractors shall note that all equipment warranties, as described in the various sections of the

Specifications, will begin after Substantial Completion. It will not make any difference when equipment is ordered, delivered or installed, warranties will commence after the Architect issues his letter of

“Substantial Completion.”

B. All equipment is to include factory start-up unless the Contractor receives written permission, from the owner, for Contractor start-up. Copies of the start-up report must be included with the Request for Final

Payment, otherwise final payment will be withheld until the factory reports are submitted.

C. All equipment furnished for this Owner shall include a one-year warranty on parts and labor. This

SUMMARY OF WORK NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 230000 – page 4 #1397 warranty shall supercede all notations in all the other Division 23 specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable).

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

# 1397 Section 230500 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

Sleeves.

Escutcheons.

HVAC demolition.

Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

Painting and finishing.

Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1.

2.

3.

CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

PE: Polyethylene plastic.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1.

2.

EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 230500 – page 2 #1397

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Transition fittings.

Dielectric fittings.

Mechanical sleeve seals.

Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

# 1397 Section 230500 – page 3

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. a. b.

Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

I.

1.

2.

CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 230500 – page 4 #1397

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1.

2.

3.

Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1.

2.

Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

# 1397 Section 230500 – page 5

3.

4.

Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

5.

6.

7.

Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove

damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 230500 – page 6 #1397 g. h.

Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw.

Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2.

3.

Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

4. a. b. c.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to

2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1.

2.

3.

Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration

Firestopping" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

# 1397 Section 230500 – page 7

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior

Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 230500 – page 8 #1397

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENT FOR

HVAC EQUIPMENT

#1397 Section 230513 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Motor controllers.

Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC EQUIPMENT

Section 230513 – page 2 #1397

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1.

2.

For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

I.

J.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

Insulation: Class F.

Code Letter Designation:

1.

2.

Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

Provide communications card that is compatible with the building management system.

Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENT FOR

HVAC EQUIPMENT

#1397 Section 230513 – page 3

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Permanent-split capacitor.

Split phase.

Capacitor start, inductor run.

Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermalprotection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230523 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Bronze ball valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230523 - page 2 #1397

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1.

2.

3.

Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1.

2.

Maintain valve end protection.

Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1.

2.

3.

Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.

Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230523 - page 3 c. d. e. f.

Hammond Valve.

Milwaukee Valve Company.

NIBCO INC.

Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

Standard: MSS SP-110.

SWP Rating: 150 psig.

CWP Rating: 600 psig.

Body Design: Two piece.

Body Material: Bronze.

Ends: Threaded.

Seats: PTFE or TFE.

Stem: Bronze.

Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230523 - page 4 #1397

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1.

2.

Shutoff Service: Ball.

Throttling Service except Steam: Ball valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

#1397 Section 230529 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Steel pipe hangers and supports.

Trapeze pipe hangers.

Metal framing systems.

Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

Fastener systems.

Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1.

2.

Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.

2.

3.

Steel pipe hangers and supports.

Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

Powder-actuated fastener systems.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Section 230529 – page 2 #1397

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1.

2.

3.

Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.

Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.

Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.

B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

Empire Industries, Inc.

ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.

8.

9.

Grinnell Corp.

GS Metals Corp.

10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

12. PHS Industries, Inc.

13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

14. Tolco Inc.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

#1397 Section 230529 – page 3

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structuralsteel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Manufacturers:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.

GS Metals Corp.

Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.

Thomas & Betts Corporation.

Tolco Inc.

Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

PHS Industries, Inc.

Pipe Shields, Inc.

Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Section 230529 – page 4 #1397

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.

Hilti, Inc.

ITW Ramset/Red Head.

Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

MKT Fastening, LLC.

Powers Fasteners.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1.

2.

Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

#1397 Section 230529 – page 5

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,

NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,

NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8.

9.

Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

10. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

11. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

13. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1.

2.

Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.

Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Section 230529 – page 6 #1397

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction

3.

4.

5. to attach to top flange of structural shape.

Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

6.

7.

Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.

8.

9.

Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. b. c.

Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1.

2.

3.

Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.

Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to

25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

#1397 Section 230529 – page 7 erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. b. c.

Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

Remove welding flux immediately.

Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Section 230529 – page 8 #1397

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230593 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems.

Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the

TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality

Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the

Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Instrument type and make.

Serial number.

Application.

Dates of use.

Dates of calibration.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230593 - page 2 #1397

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB.

1.

2.

TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB.

TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1.

2.

Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning Authority.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5,

"Instrumentation."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period.

Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about

HVAC system and equipment controls.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230593 - page 3

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1.

2.

Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I.

J.

Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.

Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in

SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2013, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230593 - page 2 #1397

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

2. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. b. c.

Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230593 - page 5 d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed.

Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1.

2.

3.

Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1.

2.

Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system.

Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230593 - page 2 #1397

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

Check liquid level in expansion tank.

Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

B. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

C. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

Water flow rate.

Water pressure drop.

Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

Airflow.

Air pressure drop.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

Airflow.

Air pressure drop.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230593 - page 7

5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1.

2.

3.

Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.11 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in

"Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices.

Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1.

2.

Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Pump curves.

Fan curves.

Manufacturers' test data.

Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Title page.

Name and address of the TAB contractor.

Project name.

Project location.

Architect's name and address.

Engineer's name and address.

Contractor's name and address.

Report date.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230593 - page 2 #1397

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following: a. b. c.

Indicated versus final performance.

Notable characteristics of systems.

Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

Conditions of filters.

Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

Water and steam flow rates.

Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

Terminal units.

Balancing stations.

Position of balancing devices.

E. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

System identification.

Location.

Coil type.

Number of rows.

Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

Make and model number.

Face area in sq. ft..

Tube size in NPS.

Tube and fin materials.

Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d.

Air flow rate in cfm.

Average face velocity in fpm.

Air pressure drop in inches wg.

Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230593 - page 9 e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

Water flow rate in gpm.

Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

Entering-water temperature in deg F.

Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

Motor Data:

System identification.

Location.

Make and type.

Model number and size.

Manufacturer's serial number.

Arrangement and class.

Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. a. b. c. d. e. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Motor make, and frame type and size.

Horsepower and rpm.

Volts, phase, and hertz.

Full-load amperage and service factor.

Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

Number, make, and size of belts.

Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

Total airflow rate in cfm.

Total system static pressure in inches wg.

Fan rpm.

Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

Suction static pressure in inches wg.

G. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

2. a. b. c. d. e.

System and air-handling-unit identification.

Location and zone.

Room or riser served.

Coil make and size.

Flowmeter type.

Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230593 - page 2 #1397 a. b. c. d. e. f.

Air flow rate in cfm.

Entering-water temperature in deg F.

Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.

Entering-air temperature in deg F.

Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

H. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data: a. b. c. d. e.

Instrument type and make.

Serial number.

Application.

Dates of use.

Dates of calibration.

3.13 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1.

2. a. b. c. d. e.

After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

Check the following for each system:

Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point.

Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Commissioning Authority.

The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

Commissioning Authority.

Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230593 - page 11

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Insulation Materials: a. b.

Flexible elastomeric.

Mineral fiber.

6.

7.

8.

9.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Adhesives.

Mastics.

Lagging adhesives.

Sealants.

Factory-applied jackets.

Field-applied jackets.

Tapes.

Securements.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets

(both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.

Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.

Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.

Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.

Detail application of field-applied jackets.

Detail application at linkages of control devices.

Detail field application for each equipment type.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 2 #1397 attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and

Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1.

2.

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of

150 or less.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section

"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 3

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to

ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 1427-

07, Type I for tubular materials. UV resistant polyethylene jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.

Gelcopper Line Sets.

Engineer approved equal.

F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,

Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.

Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.

Johns Manville; Microlite.

Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.

Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

2. a. b. c. d. e.

Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.

Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 4 #1397

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.

Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.

RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.

ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.

Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.

ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.

Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-

19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

2.

3.

4.

5. a. b. c. d. e. f.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.

ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.

Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.

Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.

Vimasco Corporation; 749.

Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.

Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 5 a. b. c. d. e. f.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.

ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.

Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.

Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.

Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.

Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.

Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.

Color: White.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.

Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.

Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.

Vimasco Corporation; 136.

Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.

Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.

Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.

Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factoryapplied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1.

2.

ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with

ASTM C 1136, Type I.

FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 6 #1397

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

2.

3.

4. a. b. c. d.

Johns Manville; Zeston.

P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.

Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

Color: White.

Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, and mechanical joints..

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1.

2.

3.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.

Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.

Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.

Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Width: 3 inches.

Thickness: 11.5 mils.

Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

Elongation: 2 percent.

Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.

Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.

Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.

Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

Width: 3 inches.

Thickness: 6.5 mils.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 7

4.

5.

6.

7.

Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

Elongation: 2 percent.

Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. a. b. c. d.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.

Compac Corp.; 130.

Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.

Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

Width: 2 inches.

Thickness: 6 mils.

Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.

Elongation: 500 percent.

Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.

Childers Products; Bands.

PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.

RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2.

3.

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick,

3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitordischarge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

2. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; CD.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 8 #1397

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3.

4.

5.

6. b. c. d.

Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: b. c. d.

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.

2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.

Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.

Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA.

2) GEMCO; Press and Peel.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. c. d.

Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanizedsteel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 9 a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

7.

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b.

Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a.

Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) GEMCO.

2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

C & F Wire.

Childers Products.

PABCO Metals Corporation.

RPR Products, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1.

2.

3.

Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 10 #1397

2. coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I.

J.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1.

2.

Draw jacket tight and smooth.

Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 11

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

4.

5. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Vibration-control devices.

Testing agency labels and stamps.

Nameplates and data plates.

Manholes.

Handholes.

Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 12 #1397

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1.

2.

3.

Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

Fabricate boxes from stainless steel, at least 0.040 inch thick.

For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket.

Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic.

Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 13

8.

9.

For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.

Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment.

Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands.

Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the twopart section on the vertical center line of valve body.

When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve.

Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1.

2.

Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 14 #1397

2.

3.

4.

When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1.

2.

Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1.

2.

3.

Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4.

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1.

2.

3.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 15 a. b. c. d. e. f.

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

F.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. b.

Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals.

Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5.

6.

7.

Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inchwide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1.

2.

3.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. b. c. d. e.

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 16 #1397 consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. b.

Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals.

Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5.

6.

Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inchwide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1.

2.

3.

Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule"

Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing fieldapplied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and threelocations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

HVAC INSULATION

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 230700 - page 17

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.

Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.

Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

Outdoor, concealed supply and return.

Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Fibrous-glass ducts.

Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

Flexible connectors.

Vibration-control devices.

Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1.

2.

Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1.

2.

Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1.

2.

Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

HVAC INSULATION HVAC INSULATION NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 230700 - page 18 #1397

1.

2.

3.

Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

Underground piping.

Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

C. Suction and Liquid Refrigerant line sets for VRF systems: Gelcopper, pre-insulated Type ACR piping with polyethylene closed cell insulation. Insulation thickness: 1/2".

D. Indoor Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing for conventional air-conditioning systems:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric, Armacell or approved equal, 1 inch thick

E. Outdoor Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing for conventional air-conditioning systems:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral Fiber: 1 inch thick with PVC jacket, 30 mils thick.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HYDRONIC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232113 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1.

2.

Hot-water heating piping.

Condensate-drain piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

B. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.

C. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F.

Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.

Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.

Pressure-seal fittings.

Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibratedorifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

Air control devices.

Chemical treatment.

Hydronic specialties.

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

HYDRONIC PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232113 - page 2 #1397

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section VIII, Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1.

2.

3.

Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.

Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting.

Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted.

E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HYDRONIC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232113 - page 3

2.2 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. b.

Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

F. a. b. c.

PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers."

Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.

HYDRONIC PIPING

Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

232113 - 3

HYDRONIC PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232113 - page 4 #1397 b. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description: a. b. c. d. e.

Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

C. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.5 VALVES

A. Bronze, Y-Pattern Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Victaulic/Tour & Andersson

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1) 300 PSI Series 786, 787 & 78K (soldered or threaded ends).

2) 300 PSI Series 788 & 789 (flanged or grooved ends). b. c.

Armstrong.

Wheatley.

Use for throttling in water service 1/2” to 16”.

Provide valves of Y-Pattern design suitable for water temperatures to 250ºF. Provide valves with provision for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Each meter connection to have pressure/temperature readout points.

Construct valves up to 2” of pressure die cast nonporous Ametal® copper alloy providing dielectric protection and 2-1/2” and over of ductile iron body and Ametal® non ferrous copper alloy internal components.

Valves to be omnidirectional without affecting flow measurement and shall provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing, positive shut-off with no drip seat.

Construct valves so that 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 or 22 full turns of handwheel provides maximum setting with hidden memory feature and tamper proof balancing setting.

Coil Components: Install with balancing valves 2” and smaller, Victaulic Series 78U union port fitting, Series 78Y strainer/ball valve or Series 78T union/ball valve combination. Victaulic Series

799 or Series 79V with ATC valve.

Provide TA CM 73M computerized flow reading kit compatible with valve flow reading kits to be handed over to the owner.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HYDRONIC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232113 - page 5

2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Amtrol, Inc.

Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

Taco.

B. Manual Air Vents:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Body: Bronze.

Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.

CWP Rating: 150 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

Grooved end Y-pattern strainer, Victaulic 732, also acceptable.

Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

CWP Rating: 125 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

B. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 5

HYDRONIC PIPING

PIPING INSTALLATIONS

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232113 - page 6 #1397

3.3

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I.

J.

Install piping to allow application of insulation.

Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers

NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for

HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HYDRONIC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232113 - page 7

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.

Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer.

Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.

Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.

Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 7

HYDRONIC PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232113 - page 8 #1397

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure.

If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing.

Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in

Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HYDRONIC PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232113 - page 9

5.

6.

After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Open manual valves fully.

Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely

(automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers to specified values.

Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

END OF SECTION

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 9

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS REFRIGERANT PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232300 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1.

2.

Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.

B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-22:

1.

2.

3.

Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 185 psig.

Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 325 psig.

Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 325 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Thermostatic expansion valves.

Solenoid valves.

Filter dryers.

Strainers.

Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

1.

2.

Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.

Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

REFRIGERANT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232300 - page 2 #1397

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Flexible Connectors:

Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.

End Connections: Socket ends.

Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch long assembly.

Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS REFRIGERANT PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232300 - page 3

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern.

Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

Seat: Nylon.

End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

Operator: Rising stem.

Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

C. Check Valves:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.

End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

D. Service Valves:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

End Connections: Copper spring.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.

Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

End Connections: Threaded.

Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.

Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

Manual operator.

Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1.

2.

Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

REFRIGERANT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232300 - page 4 #1397

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.

Superheat: Adjustable.

Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.

Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.

G. Straight-Type Strainers:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.

End Connections: Socket or flare.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

H. Angle-Type Strainers:

I.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.

Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.

Screen: 100-mesh monel.

End Connections: Socket or flare.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

J.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Body: Forged brass.

Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen.

Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.

Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.

End Connections: Socket or flare.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets.

Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.

Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).

End Connections: Socket.

Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement.

Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.

Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS REFRIGERANT PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232300 - page 5

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Atofina Chemicals, Inc.

DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.

INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.

C. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

D. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A & R-22

A. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1.

2.

3.

Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-reliefvalve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

REFRIGERANT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232300 - page 6 #1397

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected:

1.

2.

3.

Solenoid valves.

Thermostatic expansion valves.

Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

K. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

L. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

M. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.

Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

Liquid lines may be installed level.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS REFRIGERANT PIPING

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 232300 - page 7

N. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansionvalve bulb.

O. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

1.

2.

Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe.

Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.

Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.

REFRIGERANT PIPING NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 232300 - page 8 #1397

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1.

2.

3. a. b. c. d.

Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.

Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test.

Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for

12 hours, system is ready for charging.

Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS METAL DUCTS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233113 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

Sheet metal materials.

Sealants and gaskets.

Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1.

2.

Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE

62.1-2013.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1.

2.

3.

Liners and adhesives.

Sealants and gaskets.

Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Field quality-control reports.

METAL DUCTS

QUALITY ASSURANCE

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233113 - page 2 #1397

1.5

A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2013, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2013, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Lindab Inc.

McGill AirFlow LLC.

SEMCO Incorporated.

Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class,

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS METAL DUCTS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233113 - page 3 applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical

Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1.

2.

Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct

Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or

No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1.

2.

Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

Tape Width: 3 inches.

METAL DUCTS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233113 - page 4 #1397

3.

4.

Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

Water resistant.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Mold and mildew resistant.

Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

Service: Indoor and outdoor.

Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.

10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Application Method: Brush on.

Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

Water resistant.

Mold and mildew resistant.

VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

Service: Indoor or outdoor.

Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

Type: S.

Grade: NS.

Class: 25.

Use: O.

For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F.

1.

2.

3.

Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for

10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger

Sizes for Round Duct."

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS METAL DUCTS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233113 - page 5

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1.

2.

3.

Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system.

Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

METAL DUCTS

INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233113 - page 6 #1397

3.2

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible":

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B.

Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A.

7.

8.

Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C.

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,

"Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS METAL DUCTS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233113 - page 7

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for

Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct

Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC."

3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. b. c. d.

Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg.

Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.

SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.

SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

B. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: a. b.

Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

C. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

METAL DUCTS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233113 - page 8 #1397

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. c.

Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2.

3.

Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. b. c.

Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4,

"Vane Support in Elbows."

Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows."

Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for

90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for

90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. b. c.

D. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. b.

Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS METAL DUCTS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233113 - page 9

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. b. c.

Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233300 - page 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

Manual volume dampers.

Fire dampers.

Flange connectors.

Turning vanes.

Flexible ducts.

Duct-mounted access doors.

Flexible connectors.

Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. b. c. d.

Special fittings.

Manual volume damper installations.

Control damper installations.

Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233300 - page 2 #1397

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1.

2.

Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Greenheck Fan Corporation.

Pottorff Company

Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.052-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch- thick, rollformed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233300 - page 3

1.

2.

Material: Nonferrous metal.

Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

Electric actuators.

Chain pulls.

Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

6.

7.

8. a. b.

Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum.

Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

Screen Material: Galvanized steel.

Screen Type: Insect.

90-degree stops.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

McGill AirFlow LLC.

Greenheck

Ruskin Company.

Pottorff Company

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

Frames: a. b. c.

Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.

Mitered and welded corners.

Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

Blades: a. b. c. d.

Multiple or single blade.

Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

Stiffen damper blades for stability.

Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.

Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233300 - page 4 #1397 b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. c.

Greenheck

Pottorff Company d. Ruskin Company.

Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

Frames:

5.

6.

7. a. b. c. d.

Hat shaped.

Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.

Mitered and welded corners.

Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

Blades: a. b. c. d.

Multiple or single blade.

Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

Stiffen damper blades for stability.

Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.

Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal.

Bearings: a. b.

Oil-impregnated bronze.

Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8.

9.

Blade Seals: Neoprene.

Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel.

10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

11. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2.

3.

Pottorff.

Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233300 - page 5

D. Fire Rating: 3 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1.

2.

Minimum Thickness: 0.05 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Ductmate Industries, Inc.

Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Ductmate Industries, Inc.

Duro Dyne Inc.

SEMCO Incorporated.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233300 - page 6 #1397

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Double wall.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Ductmate Industries, Inc.

Greenheck Fan Corporation.

McGill AirFlow LLC.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11,

"Access Panels - Round Duct."

1.

2.

3.

Door: a. b. c. d. e.

Double wall, rectangular.

Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class.

Vision panel.

Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

Number of Hinges and Locks: a. b. c. d.

Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Ductmate Industries, Inc.

Flame Gard, Inc.

3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428-inch stainless steel.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233300 - page 7

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Ductmate Industries, Inc.

Duro Dyne Inc.

Ventfabrics, Inc.

Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of

2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1.

2.

3.

Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1.

2.

3.

Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..

Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.

Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop.

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

McGill AirFlow LLC.

Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233300 - page 8 #1397

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive.

Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2013.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket.

Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct

Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1.

2.

Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233300 - page 9

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Upstream and downstream from duct filters.

At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

At drain pans and seals.

Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment.

Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 7.

8.

9.

Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.

Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.

10. Control devices requiring inspection.

11. Elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Connect supply diffusers to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Description:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy.

Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's recommendations.

Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an installed

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233300 - page 10 #1397

7.

8.

9. instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of

0.5 percent.

Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

If after-calibration-indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance instruments.

Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE Guideline 11,

"Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.

Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233423 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

Certified fan sound-power ratings.

Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

Roof curbs.

Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1.

2.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

Ceiling suspension assembly members.

Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Field quality-control reports.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233423 - page 2 #1397

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-

Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Greenheck.

Loren Cook Company.

Penn Barry.

B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum, Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

F. Accessories:

1.

2.

3.

Motor Mounted Speed Dial: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.

Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.

Integral back-draft damper.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233423 - page 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and

5.

6.

7.

8.

9. install belt guards.

Adjust belt tension.

Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233423 - page 4 #1397

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 233713 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Ceiling linear slot outlets.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1.

2.

Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Ceiling suspension assembly members.

Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

Duct access panels.

C. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOUVERED FACE DIFFUSERS

2.2 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS

A. Plenum Slot Diffuser, Tag-A:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 233713 - page 2 #1397 a. b. c.

Price.

Titus.

Krueger.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Material - Shell: Steel.

Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.

Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, white.

Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.

Slot Width: 1 inch.

Number of Slots: Three.

8.

9.

Length: 48 inches.

Mounting: Surface or T-bar.

10. Plenum: Foil face insulated with center notch.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of

Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238126 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes new compressor-condenser components for an existing split-system airconditioning indoor unit consisting of separate evaporator-fan and refrigerant coil.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

COORDINATION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238126 - page 2 #1397

1.5

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion except compressor five years from substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Goodman.

Lennox

York

2.2 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, consisting of compressor, condenser coil, fan, motors, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls.

B. Compressor: Reciprocating.

1.

2.

3.

Motor: Single speed, and includes thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

Accumulator: Suction tube.

Refrigerant Charge: R-22.

C. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; circuited for integral liquid subcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports.

D. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated, totally enclosed fan motor with thermal-overload protection.

E. Accessories:

1.

2.

3.

Cycle Protector: Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid compressor cycling.

Filter-dryer.

High-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on high refrigerant pressure.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238126 - page 3

4.

5.

6.

7.

Liquid-line solenoid.

Low-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on low refrigerant pressure.

Hard-start kit.

Liquid line solenoid kit: Prevents refrigerant migration back to the compressor when unit is in the

Off cycle.

F. Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Install condensing units on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in

Division 3.

C. Vibration Isolation: Mount condensing units on rubber pads with a minimum deflection of 1/4 inch.

Based on supporting structure and seismic requirements, insert amount of required deflection in first paragraph below.

D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1.

2.

3.

Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238126 - page 4 #1397

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS VARIABLE REFRIGERANT

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238127 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) HVAC system shall be a variable capacity, direct expansion (DX) and heat pump engineered system. The outdoor unit shall consist of one or more cabinet(s) connected through common refrigerant piping. Each system shall have single or multiple, inverter compressor(s). Each system shall be connected to multiple indoor units (ducted, non-ducted or combination thereof) through a common refrigerant piping and integrated system controls. Each indoor unit shall be controlled individually.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, sequence of operations and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1.

2.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238127 - page 2 #1397

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Organization for Standardization

(ISO).

B. All electrical power wiring shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and all applicable state and local building codes.

C. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label and comply with UL 1995 Heat and Cooling Equipment Standard for Safety.

D. All systems must be AHRI 1230 Certified and listed in the certified product directory.

E. The VRF system shall be installed by a licensed mechanical contractor trained by the VRF equipment manufacturer or certified manufacturer’s agent. If contractor is not licensed by VRF equipment manufacturer as an approved installer then contractor shall provide written proof of certification prior to the start of installation.

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All VRF equipment shall be stored protected from weather, extreme temperature, etc. as suggested by the manufacturer. All VRF equipment shall be moved, lifted, etc. as suggested by the manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: a. b. c.

For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

For Parts: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

For Labor: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. LG Electronics (Energy Transfer Solutions, Inc. – 610-444-0333)

2. Panasonic

3. Toshiba Carrier Corporation.

B. Other comparable products by the other manufacturers listed above if submitted other than the basis of design product (LG Multi-V VRF) must meet or exceed all performance and capacity criteria of the basis of design product. This will be reviewed in detail by Engineer during the submittal process.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS VARIABLE REFRIGERANT

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238127 - page 3

2.2 OUTDOOR UNIT

C. Outdoor Unit shall be capable at the following operating ambient air conditions.

1. Operating Range: a. b.

Cooling: 14 deg F dry bulb to 122 deg F dry bulb.

Heating: -13 deg F wet bulb to 61 deg F wet bulb.

D. General:

1. The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant.

2. Each system shall have one air source outdoor units.

3.

4.

Dual and triple frame configurations shall be field piped together using manufacturer's designed and supplied Y-branch kit and field provided interconnecting pipe to form a common refrigerant circuit.

Refrigerant circuit configuration for Heat Pump System

5. a. The refrigerant circuit shall be constructed using field provided copper piped together with manufacturer supplied Y- branches or Headers connected to multiple (ducted, non-ducted or combination thereof) indoor units to effectively and efficiently control heating or cooling operation of the VRF system. b. All refrigerant pipe, y-branch, header kit, elbows and valves shall be individually insulated with no air gaps. All joints shall be glued and sealed.

Factory installed microprocessor controls in the outdoor unit(s) and indoor unit(s) shall perform functions to efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate in a daisy chain configuration

6.

7.

8.

9. between outdoor unit and indoor unit(s) via RS485.

The system shall be designed to accept connection up to 58 indoor units.

The system shall be capable of performing continuous operation when an individual indoor unit is being serviced or power to indoor unit is disconnected.

The maximum allowable system combination ratio shall be 130%. Systems designed with combination ratio above 130% are not acceptable.

The total nominal capacity of all indoor units shall be no less than 50% and no more than 130% of outdoor unit's nominal capacity to ensure the VRF system will have sufficient capacity to meet the building's cooling and heating load at design day weather conditions.

10. The outdoor unit shall have a fusible plug.

11. The fusible plug shall have a threaded connector.

12. The unit shall be shipped from the factory fully assembled including internal refrigerant piping, compressor, contacts, relay(s), power and communications wiring necessary.

13. Each outdoor unit refrigeration circuit shall have the following components: a. Refrigerant strainer(s). b. c.

Check valve(s).

Oil separator. i. j. k. l. d. e. f. g. h.

Accumulator.

Reversing valve.

Vapor injection valve.

Variable path valve.

Oil Level sensor.

Electronic expansion valve(s).

Sub-cooler.

High and low side Schrader valve service ports with caps.

Service valves.

E. Refrigerant Pipe System Design Parameters:

1. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at an elevation difference of up to 360 feet above or

2. below the lowest or highest indoor unit respectively.

The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 3280 equivalent length feet of interconnecting liquid line refrigerant pipe in the network.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238127 - page 4 #1397

3. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 656 actual feet or 738 equivalent length feet of liquid line refrigerant pipe spanning between outdoor unit and farthest indoor unit.

F.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Defrost Operations:

1. The outdoor unit(s) shall be capable of auto defrost operation to melt accumulated frost off the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The defrost cycle control shall be based on outdoor ambient temperatures and outdoor unit heat exchanger temperatures.

Split Coil Defrost

All single frame units shall have split coil defrost system

6.

Split Frame Defrost

Multiple frame outdoor units shall be capable of split-frame defrost for 2 out of every 3 defrost cycles, allowing heating mode indoor unit fans to remain on.

The third defrost cycle shall switch all outdoor units to defrost mode to fully melt the ice accumulations off the outdoor coil while turning off heat mode indoor unit fans.

G. Oil Management:

1. The system shall be provided with a centrifugal oil separator designed to extract oil from the oil/refrigerant gas stream leaving the compressor and return the extracted oil to the compressor oil

2.

3.

4. sump.

The system shall have an oil level sensor in the compressor to provide direct oil level sensing.

The system shall only initiate an oil return cycle if the oil level is too low.

The system shall have high pressure oil return.

H. Cabinet:

1. Outdoor unit cabinet shall be made of 20 gauge galvanized steel with an enamel finish.

2. Outdoor unit cabinet finish shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours.

3. The front panels of the outdoor units shall be removable type for access to internal components.

4. A smaller service access panel, not larger than 6.25"x 6.67" and secured by a maximum of (2) screws shall be provided to access the following: a. Service tool connection. b. DIP switches. c. Auto addressing. d. Error codes

5. The cabinet shall have piping knockouts to allow refrigerant piping to be connected at the front or through the bottom of the unit.

I.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Fan:

1.

7.

Each cabinet shall be equipped with two direct drive variable speed propeller fan(s) with BLDC motor(s) with a vertical air discharge.

The fan(s) blades shall be made of Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) material.

The fan(s) motor shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings.

The fan motor shall be variable speed with a maximum operating speed of 1050 RPM.

The fan shall have a raised guard to help prevent contact with moving parts.

The cabinet shall have option to change the discharge air direction from vertical to horizontal using optional factory provided air guides.

The cabinet shall have DIP switch setting to raise external static pressure up to 0.32 in-wg.

J. Coil:

1. The outdoor unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing.

2. The copper tubes shall have inner groves.

3. The aluminum fins shall have factory applied corrosion resistant GoldFin™ material.

4. Coil coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS VARIABLE REFRIGERANT

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238127 - page 5

5. The outdoor unit coil shall be tested to a pressure of 551 psig.

6. The coil for each cabinet shall have 14 Fins per Inch (FPI).

7. All the outdoor units shall have a 3 rows heat exchanger.

8. The cabinet shall have a coil guard.

K. Compressor(s):

1. Each cabinet shall be equipped with two hermetically sealed, inverter driven, digitally controlled

2. scroll compressors.

Each inverter driven, digitally scroll compressor shall be capable of operating in a frequency range

3.

4.

5.

6. from 15 Hz to 150 Hz with control in 0.5 Hz increments.

The compressor(s) shall be equipped with a 60 Watt crankcase heater.

The compressor shall use a factory charge of Polyvinyl Ether (PVE) oil.

The compressor bearing(s) shall have Teflon™ coating.

7.

The continuous operating range shall be a. Cooling: 14°F to 119°F (DB) b. Heating: 13°F to 75°F (WB)

The compressor(s) shall be protected with: a. b. c. d.

High Pressure switch

Over-current /under current protection

Phase failure

Phase reversal

L. Electrical:

1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208V, 60 Hz, 3 phase.

2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operation within voltage limits of +/- 10% rated voltage.

3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.

M. Sound Levels:

1. Each cabinet shall be rated with a sound level not to exceed 59.5 dB(A) when tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO3745 standard.

N. Sensors:

1. Each single cabinet shall have: a. Suction temperature sensor. b. Discharge temperature sensor. c. High Pressure sensor. d. Low Pressure sensor. e. Outdoor temperature sensor. f. Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensor.

O. Controls:

1. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, stranded, and shielded cable for the RS485 daisy chain communication.

2.4 4-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT (TYPE AHU)

A. General:

1. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested.

2. Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application.

3. Unit shall be designed to mount recessed in the ceiling and has a surface mounted concentric grille on the bottom of the unit.

4. The unit shall be available in both 2’ x 2’ and 3’ x 3’ chassis.

5. Unit shall be capable to be installed with heat pump or heat recovery or cooling VRF system.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238127 - page 6 #1397

B. Casing and Panel:

1. Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate.

2. The unit shall be provided with an off-white Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) polymeric resin architectural grille.

3. The grille shall have a tapered trim edge, and a hinged, spring clip (screw-less) return air filtergrille door.

4. Unit shall be provided with metal ears designed to support the unit weight on four corners.

5. Ears shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept field supplied all thread rod hangers.

C. Cabinet Assembly:

1. Unit shall have four supply air outlets and one return air inlet.

2. The supply air outlet shall be through four-directional slot diffuser each equipped with independent oscillating motorized guide vane designed to change the airflow direction.

3. The grille shall have a discharge range of motion of 40° in an up/down direction with capabilities of locking the vanes.

4. The unit shall have a guide vane algorithm designed to sequentially change the predominant discharge airflow direction in counterclockwise pattern.

5. Guide vanes shall provide airflow in all directions.

6. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature thermistors for a. Return air. b. Refrigerant entering coil. c. Refrigerant leaving coil.

7. Unit shall have a factory assembled, piped and wired electronic expansion valve (EEV) for refrigerant control.

8. Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with other indoor units and to the outdoor unit.

9. The unit shall have factory designated branch duct knockouts on the unit case.

10. The unit shall have provision of fresh air ventilation through a knock-out on the cabinet.

11. The branch duct knockouts shall have the ability to duct up to one-half the unit airflow capacity.

12. The branch duct cannot be ducted to another room.

13. Unit shall have the following functions as standard a. Self-diagnostic function. b. Auto restart function. c. Auto operation function. d. Child lock function. e. Forced operation. f. Dual thermistor control. g. Sleep mode.

D. Fan and Motor Assembly:

1. The unit shall have a single direct driven turbo fan.

2. The fan shall be made of high strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin.

3. The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.

4. The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets.

5. The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based direct digitally controlled algorithm.

6. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Super Low, Low, Med, High,

Power Cool and Auto.

7. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings: Super Low, Low, Med, High and Auto.

8. The Auto fan setting shall adjust the fan speed to most effectively achieve the set-point.

9. Unit shall have factory installed motorized louver to provide flow of air in up and down direction for uniform airflow.

E. Filter:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS VARIABLE REFRIGERANT

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238127 - page 7

1. The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied primary removable, washable filter.

2. The filter access shall be from the bottom of the unit.

F. Coil:

1. Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded on copper tubing.

2. Unit shall have minimum of 2 rows of coils.

3. Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below the coil.

4. Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe connections

5. The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551 psig.

6. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated.

G. Condensate Pump:

1. Unit shall have a factory installed and wired condensate drain pump capable of providing minimum 27.5 inch lift from bottom surface of the unit.

2. The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if condensate rises too high in the drain pan.

H. Electrical:

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hz.

2. The indoor unit shall be capable of operation within voltage limits of +/-10% rated voltage.

I. Controls:

1. Unit shall use a programmable controller provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain.

2. The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system.

3. The unit shall be able to communicate with other indoor units and the outdoor unit using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 2 core, stranded and shielded communication cable.

4. The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the five operating modes: a. Auto changeover. b. Heating. c. Cooling. d. Dry. e. Fan only.

2.5 INSTALLATION

P. Install units level and plumb.

Q. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

R. Equipment Mounting

1. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

S. Install all controls and control wiring noted above and required for a complete fully correctly functioning

VRF system. This to include time required for programming of the system to provide a system manufacturer sequence of operation to be submitted and approved by Engineer.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

FLOW SYSTEMS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238127 - page 8 #1397

2.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized and factory-employed service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized and factory-employed service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1.

2.

3.

Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

2.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized and factory-employed service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized and factory-employed service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS FAN COIL UNITS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238219 - page 1

SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

Fan coil unit heaters with hot water coils.

Fan coil unit heaters with electric resistance heating coils.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1.

2.

Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fan Coil Unit Filters: Furnish two spare filters.

FAN COIL UNITS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238219 - page 2 #1397

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating,

Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, firesuppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

2.2 FAN COIL UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c.

Johnson Controls, Inc.

Rittling

IEC.

B. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch-thick, glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flamespread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.

C. Cabinets: 16 gauge steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color as chosen by the architect.

D. Filters: Minimum arrestance and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to

ASHRAE 52.2 and all addendums.

1.

1” pleated filters rated at 25-30% efficiency and MERV 7.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS FAN COIL UNITS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238219 - page 3

E. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.

F. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

G. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed

PSC motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

H. Control devices: Provide integral unit mounted or wall mounted thermostat or sensor as noted on drawing schedules. Provide integral unit mounted 3-speed fan switch.

I. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, to receive fan coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan coil unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers.

D. Verify locations of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

E. Install new filters in each fan coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

FAN COIL UNITS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238219 - page 4 #1397

B. Connect supply-air and return-air ducts to fan coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1.

2.

3.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.

Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to

Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan coil units.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS RADIANT CEILING PANELS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238228 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes radiant ceiling panels with electric heating elements.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

Indicate location and size of each field connection.

Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls and other accessories.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1.

2.

3.

Structural members to which radiant panels will be attached.

Method of attaching radiant panels to building structure.

Penetrations of fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace components of units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Heating output of panel is in accordance with EN 14037.

RADIANT CEILING PANELS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238228 - page 2 #1397

B. Acoustic performance is in accordance with DIN EN ISO 354.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RADIANT CEILING PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Berko

Qmark

Ritting

B. General: Description: Sheet-metal-enclosed panel with heating element suitable for lay-in installation flush with T-bar ceiling grid. Comply with UL 2021.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Panel: Minimum 0.0276-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel back panel riveted to minimum 0.0396inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel front panel with fused-on crystalline surface.

Heating Element: Powdered graphite sandwiched between sheets of electric insulation.

Heating Element: Insulated resistive wires.

Electrical Connections: Nonheating, high-temperature, insulated-copper leads, factory connected to heating element.

Exposed-Side Panel Finish: Apply silk-screened finish to match appearance of Architect-selected acoustical ceiling tiles.

Wall Thermostat: Bimetal, sensing elements calibrated from 55 to 90 deg F with contacts suitable for line-voltage circuit, and manually operated on-off switch with contactors, relays, and control transformers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating panels for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1.

2.

Ensure surfaces in contact with electric heating panels are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.

Ensure surfaces and substrates are level and plumb.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install radiant-heating panels level and plumb.

B. Support for Radiant-Heating Panels in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element.

1.

2.

Install a minimum of four ceiling-support-system rods or wires for each panel. Locate not more than 6 inches from panel corners.

Support Clips: Fasten to panel and to ceiling grid members at or near each panel corner with clips designed for the application.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS RADIANT CEILING PANELS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238228 - page 3

3.

4.

Panels of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support panels independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on panel. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of the panel at a safety factor of 3.

C. Verify locations of thermostats with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 16452 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Wire and Cables."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1.

2.

Operate electric-heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.

Test and adjust controls and safeties.

D. Radiant-heating electric panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed radiant-heating electric panels from damage during construction.

B. Remove and replace damaged radiant-heating electric panels.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS CONVECTORS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238233 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hydronic finned-tube convectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

Details of custom-fabricated enclosures indicating dimensions.

Location and size of each field connection.

Location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

Location and arrangement of integral controls.

Enclosure joints, corner pieces, access doors, and other accessories.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For convection heating units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOT-WATER FINNED-TUBE CONVECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Rittling,

Sigma

Vulcan.

B. Performance Ratings: Rate finned-tube radiators according to Hydronics Institute's "I=B=R Testing and

Rating Standard for Finned-Tube (Commercial) Radiation."

C. Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins resting on element supports. One tube end shall be belled.

CONVECTORS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238233 - page 2 #1397

D. Element Supports: Ball-bearing cradle type to permit longitudinal movement on enclosure brackets.

E. Rust-Resistant Powder Coat Front Panel: Minimum 16 gauge, sloped top, ASTM A 653/A 653M,

G60 galvanized steel.

F. Wall-Mounting Back Panel: Minimum 0.0329-inch-thick steel, full height, with full-length channel support for front panel without exposed fasteners.

G. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch spacing to support front panel and element.

H. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.

I. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, minimum size 6 by 7 inches, integral with enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive convection heating units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for hydronic-piping connections to verify actual locations before convection heating unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.

C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.

D. Install access doors for access to valves.

E. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.

F. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps, except where enclosures are indicated to extend to adjoining walls.

G. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

H. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessing flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

I. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.

J. Install convectors level and plumb.

K. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS CONVECTORS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238233 - page 3

L. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

M. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect hot-water units and components to piping according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."

1. Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet.

C. Install piping adjacent to convection heating units to allow service and maintenance.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1.

2.

3.

Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper convection heating unit operation.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace convection heating units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238236 - page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric baseboard heaters.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Brasch.

Sterling

Vulcan.

B. Description: Factory-packaged units constructed according to UL 499, UL 1030, and UL 2021.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium-wire heating element enclosed in metallic sheath mechanically bonded to fins, with high-temperature cutout and sensor running the full length of element. Element supports shall eliminate thermal expansion noise.

D. Front, Back and Top Panel: Minimum 12 gauge thick steel with exposed corners rounded; removable front panels with tamper-resistant fasteners braced and reinforced for stiffness.

E. Floor-Mounted Pedestals: Conceal conduit for power and control wiring at maximum 36-inch spacing.

Pedestal-mounted back panel shall be solid panel matching front panel.

F. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch spacing to support front panel and element.

G. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.

ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 238236 - page 2 #1397

H. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, integral with enclosure.

I. Enclosure Style: Flat top.

1. Front and Bottom Inlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

2. a. Mill-finish aluminum. b. c.

Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

Painted to match enclosure.

Top Outlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing. a. b. c.

Mill-finish aluminum.

Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

Painted to match enclosure.

J. Unit Controls: Provide an integral double pole thermostat and disconnect switch in minimum 6” control section.

K. Accessories: Integral disconnect switch, Blank sections, splice plates and end caps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive convectors for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before installation of convector.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install convectors level and plumb.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground electric convectors according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1.

2.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start convectors to confirm proper operation.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 238236 - page 3

B. Convectors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS ELECTRICAL SUMMARY OF WORK

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 260000 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Divisions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

B. The requirements of all other sections of Division 26 apply to this section.

WARRANTY FOR PROJECT

1.3

A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a 1 year warranty on all materials, labor and systems from the date of Substantial Completion for each Phase. The date of Substantial completion will be as set in a letter issued by the Architect.

DEFINITIONS

A. For a complete list of definitions for this contract refer to the Division 1 specifications.

B. Provide: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

1.4

C. Install: Means to provide, install and make the equipment/system completely functional and operational with testing, commissioning and training.

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Included: It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings that the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified herein, furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary, together with the necessary accessories to constitute a satisfactory and complete installation, to complete the installation of the electrical work, as indicated on the drawings and described hereinafter. The

Contractor shall properly install, equip, adjust and put in perfect condition, the respective portions of the work specified, and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work to form a complete and properly operating whole. The work shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following for the additions and renovations to the Newark United Methodist Church:

1. Demolish electrical conduit, wiring and equipment as shown on the drawings, as required in these specifications and as required to accommodate the new and renovation construction activities and the required construction phasing to allow the Owner to occupy the building during construction.

Remove wiring back to the respective source for all associated equipment indicated to be demolished and maintain the electrical circuit integrity as required for equipment to remain.

Remove exposed conduit back to the respective source for all associated equipment indicated to be demolished – cut, cap and label conduits that are embedded in permanent walls and floors; provide cutting and patching of the same.

2. For detailed scope of work for each electrical system, refer to the respective Division 26 specification sections.

3. Phasing and Sequencing Notes: a. Contractor shall perform all work requiring power or communications outages to the building after 5 PM on Monday through Friday or on Saturday’s. No outages will be

ELECTRICAL SUMMARY OF WORK NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260000 – page 2 # 1397 b. allowed from Monday through Friday from 7 AM until 5 PM or on Sunday’s. Coordinate all power outages with Owner, at least 14 days in advance.

Refer to the contract documents for additional construction phasing and sequencing requirements.

4. Provide and install temporary electrical power to the building for construction activities in accordance with Division 1 specifications.

Provide and install lighting and power electrical panelboards and associated conduit and wiring 5. feeders.

6. Provide and install wiring and conduit for lighting and power.

7. Provide and install lighting fixtures and lighting control devices.

8. Provide and install new life safety emergency battery packs lighting fixtures and associated

9. additional wiring.

Provide and install exterior site lighting fixtures, poles, concrete foundations, and underground conduit and wiring, as indicated on drawings.

10. Provide and install new wiring devices and backboxes.

11. Provide and install new panelboard and associated feeder, conduit, and circuit breakers.

12. Provide and install new circuit breakers in existing panelboard. New circuit breakers shall match existing breaker type and AIC ratings.

13. provide and install fused or non-fused disconnect switches, or circuit breakers at the various pieces of equipment as required by the N.E.C. Code.

14. Provide and install new addressable fire alarm devices and notification appliances. Provide and install new addressable pull stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors, control and monitor modules. Provide and install new initiation and notification devices in renovated areas, as indicated on plans, as well as associated wiring, programming, testing and the like for a complete and fully functional system.

15. Provide and install network IP security cameras and associated wiring and conduit.

16. Provide and install network IP video intercom systems with remote stations and master stations, as indicated on drawings.

17. Provide and install new dimming system for sanctuary lighting fixtures, including all wiring, conduit, cabling, programming, commissioning, and training.

18. Adjust connections to electrical motors to insure proper rotation.

19. Provide and install wiring and final connections to all equipment in Architectural Specifications requiring electrical service.

20. Provide and install wiring and final connections to all equipment in Mechanical and Plumbing specifications and drawings requiring electrical service.

21. Provide and install wiring and final connections to all Kitchen equipment in Architectural

Specifications requiring electrical service.

22. Provide and install new grounding system per NEC.

23. Testing and balancing of Electrical system.

24. All necessary rigging.

25. Removal of trash and general clean-up.

26. All necessary permits, approvals, fees, etc.

27. Instruction to the Owner.

28. Cutting, patching and clean-up.

29. The contractor shall employ the services of the local Underwriters' Inspection Agency and pay for all associated fees.

B. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine all Drawings (Architectural, Structural,

Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical) to determine the full extent of the work. All field measurements

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS ELECTRICAL SUMMARY OF WORK

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 260000 – page 3 and verifications of conditions and materials will be the obligation of the Contractor. The submission of a

Proposal by the Contractor will be considered an indication that all work has been included in the

Proposal. It will also be considered an indication that a thorough review of conditions, materials, and all related specifications have been investigated by the Contractor, and the results of such investigations have been included in the Contractor's Proposal.

C. Coordination Between Mechanical and Electrical Contractors:

1. The Electrical Contractor shall: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Receive and set the motor starters as provide by the Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors.

Provide power wiring, including final connection of same, from source to starters or contactors to motors.

Receive and install the wall-mounted electrical control devices, thermal switches, etc., and provide all wiring for same.

Provide all fused or unfused disconnect switches and circuit breakers not supplied as part of the HVAC system and as required by the National Electrical Code, or as shown on the drawings, or as specified.

Adjust connections to electrical motors to insure proper rotation.

Provide new duct detectors and sampling tubes for new mechanical units and turn over to the Mechanical Contractor for installation. Wire duct detectors into the fire alarm system.

2. The Mechanical Contractor will: a. b.

Furnish and set all motors for mechanical equipment.

Furnish all motor starters, starter/disconnects, HVAC unit mounted disconnects, contactors, pushbuttons and switches for local and remote control of all HVAC equipment and turn over to the Electrical Contractor for installation. c. d. e. f. g.

Provide pre-wired control panels, including relays, switches, pilot lights, etc., all as shown and/or specified, complete with wiring to numbered terminal strips.

Furnish and install duct and pipe-mounted control devices, such as freezestats, aquastats, flow switches, etc.

Furnish wiring diagrams for the systems, in sufficient time to allow roughing-in of conduit in accordance with the proposed work schedule.

Provide all HVAC control wiring including 120V controls, 120V power and 120/24V control power transformers as required for a complete and fully functional system. EC will only bring the main power feed to each piece of equipment.

Receive and install duct detectors in new mechanical units and provide wiring and conduit for respective unit shut-down.

3. The Plumbing Contractor will: a. b. c.

Furnish and set all motors for plumbing equipment.

Coordinate locations of all equipment with both the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors.

Provide the Electrical Contractor with information and instructions for connection of electrical service to water coolers, domestic hot water heater, etc.

4. The Electrical Contractor shall examine the drawings and read the specifications for the mechanical trades, and shall note all motor-driven equipment, starters and control apparatus noted, shown or specified herein.

D. Architectural Equipment Wiring and Connections:

ELECTRICAL SUMMARY OF WORK NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260000 – page 4 # 1397

1.

2.

3.

4.

All equipment for will be furnished and set by the Equipment Contractor.

The Electrical Contractor shall run all electrical conduit and wiring to each piece of equipment requiring electrical service and shall make all final connections to the equipment.

The equipment and required wiring connections shall be as required by the manufacturer of the equipment.

This Electrical Contractor shall furnish disconnect switches at the various pieces of equipment as required by the NEC.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Contractors shall note that all equipment warranties, as described in the various sections of the

Specifications, will begin after Substantial Completion. It will not make any difference when equipment is ordered, delivered or installed, warranties will commence after the Architect issues his letter of

“Substantial Completion.”

B. All equipment is to include factory start-up unless the Contractor receives written permission, from the

Owner, for Contractor start-up. Copies of the start-up report must be included with the Request for Final

Payment, otherwise final payment will be withheld until the factory reports are submitted.

C. All equipment furnished for this Project shall include a 1-year warranty on parts and labor. This warranty shall supersede all notations in all the other Division 26 specification sections (Division 27 & 28 sections note their own warranties), except for the Structured Cabling Systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable).

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

# 1397 Section 260500 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

Sleeves for raceways and cables.

Sleeve seals.

Grout.

Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1.

2.

3.

4.

To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260500 – page

2 # 1397

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. b.

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2.

3.

4. a. b. c. d.

Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

Calpico, Inc.

Metraflex Co.

Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

# 1397 Section 260500 – page 3

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wallmounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I.

J.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260500 – page

4 # 1397

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch

(25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

# 1397 Section 260519 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

3.

Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

B. Allowable conduit and MC cable locations:

1. MC Cable may be used for all branch circuits, except: a. Surface mounted on concrete block (use surface metallic raceway in public areas). b. c.

All underground/underslab circuits.

Feeders.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical

Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Section 260519 – page 2 # 1397

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

2.

3.

General Cable Corporation.

Senator Wire & Cable Company.

4. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN. Conductor sizes #12 and

#10 shall be solid and #8 and larger shall be stranded.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for galvanized steel metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

3M; Electrical Products Division.

Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

# 1397 Section 260519 – page 3

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or

3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

Calpico, Inc.

Metraflex Co.

Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1.

2.

3.

Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance Feeders from PECO transformer to indoor MDP: Aluminum single conductors in raceway (only location where aluminum is allowed on this project).

B. Feeders: Copper stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits: Copper solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or in galvanized Type MC cable were allowed above in these specifications.

D. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type galvanized MC Cable.

E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type galvanized MC Cable.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Section 260519 – page 4 # 1397

F. Fire Alarm: Type MC FPLP cabling where concealed in above accessible ceilings and Type THHN-

THWN, in raceway where routed underground or underslab.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

G. Common neutrals shall not be used. Provide individual, dedicated neutral for each circuit.

H. Common grounds are acceptable, in accordance with the NEC.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches

(400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

# 1397 Section 260519 – page 5

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

I.

J.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section

"Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size.

Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Section 260519 – page 6 # 1397

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. a. Megger testing for 600V Feeder conductors.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance

Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1.

2.

3.

Test procedures used.

Test results that comply with requirements.

Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning cabling and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260526 –page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1.

2.

Underground distribution grounding.

Building grounding.

B. Special work:

1. Install new grounding and bonding to all systems required by the NEC including the water service, gas service, building steel, sprinkler system and the like.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

2.

3.

Ground rings.

Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

4. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems and telecommication systems based on NETA MTS. a. b.

Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.

Include recommended testing intervals.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260526 – page 2 # 1397

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical

Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

D. IEEE 837-2002 for grounding & bonding cable connections and splices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable

Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 AWG, stranded conductor or as noted on the drawings.

3. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches

(41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Exposed Cables and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Compression Connectors for all Concealed and Underground Cables: Compliant with IEEE 837-2002.

All products shall be equal to Panduit STRUCTUREDGROUND™Direct Burial Compression Grounding

System.

1.

2.

Complies with Vibration tests per MIL-STD-202G (METHOD 201A)

UL 467 Listed and CSA 22.2 Certified for grounding and bonding suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete when crimped with PANDUIT or industry standard crimping tools and

PANDUIT dies.

3. The enhanced crimp process shall emboss the die number on the part twice, for full inspectability.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260526 –page 3 # 1397

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m in diameter).

1.

2.

3.

Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200 mm) long.

Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

Connections: Compression connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

1.

2.

Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

Underground Connections: Compression connectors.

Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Compression connectors.

Connections to Structural Steel and Poles: Compression connectors.

Connections to Structural Rebar: Compression connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Feeders and branch circuits.

Lighting circuits.

Receptacle circuits.

Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

Flexible raceway runs.

Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

Cable tray systems.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260526 – page 4 # 1397

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1.

2.

3.

Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1.

2.

3.

4.

After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. b.

Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

Panel testing: Perform ground resistance testing between all existing and new panel boards and the main switchboard in the main electrical rooms. Provide test report indicating the resistance for each panel to the main.

C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260526 –page 5

2.

3.

Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and More: 5 ohms.

Structural Steel / Lightning Protection Grounds: 25 ohms.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260526 – page 6 # 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260529 –page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC or RGS: Rigid metal conduit (galvanized).

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.

2.

Steel slotted support systems.

Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260529 – page 2 # 1397

1.

2.

3.

Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.

Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.

4. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -

Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Allied Tube & Conduit.

Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ERICO International Corporation.

GS Metals Corp.

Thomas & Betts Corporation.

Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

Wesanco, Inc.

2.

3.

Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 4.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Galvanized Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260529 –page 3

Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Hilti Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

Concrete Inserts: Stainless Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway (including trapeze type systems): Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

Exception:

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260529 – page 4 # 1397

1. Where attached to wood framing systems in the building, the support spacing shall be double the requirements scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in

NFPA 70.

2. The intent of this exception is to distribute the loading of the raceways on the wood framing system.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with galvanized steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260529 –page 5 # 1397

3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260529 – page 6 # 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260533 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, floor boxes, surface divided non-metallic raceway and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. Refer to Section 260519 for allowable raceway and MC Cable locations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

F. RMC or GRS: Galvanized rigid metal conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1.

2.

Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260533 – Page 2 # 1397

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

Alflex Inc.

Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

Maverick Tube Corporation.

O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit or RGS: ANSI C80.1 with threaded fittings.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3, with compression fittings.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Die-cast, compression type.

2. Fittings for RGS: Threaded type.

G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

CANTEX Inc.

CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

Condux International, Inc.

ElecSYS, Inc.

Electri-Flex Co.

Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260533 – page 3

9. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type PVC Schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

EGS/Appleton Electric.

Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

Hoffman.

Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

RACO; a Hubbell Company.

Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized with gasketed cover.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

H. Cabinets:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

Key latch to match panelboards.

Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260533 – Page 4 # 1397

2.4 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Wiremold

2.

3.

4.

Hubbell

Panduit

Approved equal by the Engineer

B. General

1. System: Provide surface raceway systems for branch circuit and data network voice, video and

2. other low-voltage wiring. Surface raceway system shall consist of raceway bases, covers, appropriate fittings and device mounting plates necessary for a complete installation.

Configuration: Raceways shall be one- or two-piece design with base and snap-on cover, or three-

3. piece design with base and two snap-on covers which snap side by side on a common base. Base shall be dividable with a fixed barrier for up to 4 compartments. Raceway shall be available in widths of 3/4 inch to 10 inch and depths of 17/32 inch to 5 inch. Provide raceways from a company which can provide custom sizes if required. Raceway covers shall be available in tamper-resistant form with screws on access plates and covers of fittings, but not on standard cover lengths.

Fittings: Fittings shall include flat, internal and external elbows, couplings for joining raceway sections, wire clips, blank end fittings, and device mounting brackets and plates as applicable.

4.

5.

Where required, provide tamper-resistant form, dividable with barriers and matching the size of the accompanying raceway base. Provide full capacity corner elbows and tee fittings to maintain a controlled 2 inch cable bend radius, meeting the specification for Fiber Optic and UTP cabling and exceeding the TIA/EIA-569-A requirements for communications pathways.

Device Brackets and Plates: Provide in sizes to match the raceway width and with mounting holes located to ensure proper mounting of devices in up to 4 compartments. Device plates shall be available in any length from 6 inch to 60 inch, with cutouts to accommodate various combinations of power and communications devices in up to 4 compartments. Provide 6 inch and 12 inch long device plates with a flange to overlap the joint of adjacent cover as applicable.

Communications Devices and Accessories: Raceway shall accommodate a complete line of connectivity outlets and modular inserts for UTP (including Category 5, 5e, 6) STP (150 ohm) fiber optic, coaxial, and other cabling types with matching faceplates and bezels to facilitate mounting. Where indicated, provide connectivity outlets and modular inserts by Ortronics or approved equal.

C. Classification

1. Raceway and system components shall be UL and CUL listed.

2.

3.

Surface raceways shall be suitable for use in dry interior locations only, as covered in Article 386

(Surface Metal Raceways) 388 (Surface Nonmetallic Raceways) of the National Electrical Code.

Surface metal raceways and fittings shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories under File

Number E4376, Listing and Classification Number RJBT and File Number E41751, Listing and

4.

5.

Classification Number RJPR respectively.

Systems shall comply with UL Standard UL5 for Surface Metal Raceways.

Larger 2 and 3 channel non-metallic raceways shall be UL Listed under File Nos. E90378 Guide

RJTX and E90377 Guide RJYT, respectively.

D. Surface metal raceways:

1. Trade Reference: Surface Mounted Steel Raceways by The Wiremold Company; Series V500 and

2.

3.

V700.

Material: Galvanized steel, minimum thickness 0.040 inches.

Finish: Manufacturer's custom ScuffCoat

, color as selected by Architect (ivory, gray, black, etc.).

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260533 – page 5

4.

5.

Steel Device Brackets and Plates: Steel overlap device plate for horizontal installation of devices.

Plate shall overlap cover to conceal seam.

Plastic Overlapping Cover Bracket and Faceplate: Plastic device mounting bracket and trim plate for horizontal installation of devices. Plate shall overlap cover to conceal seam. Faceplate shall accept a variety of power and data/communication devices. Plastic shall be compatible with UL

94 for Plastic.

2.5 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or

3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Exposed Conduit: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.

Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.

Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried or concrete encased ductbank as indicated on the drawings.

Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC.

Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring and Communications Wiring: a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for

Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, ANSI/SCTE 77 2007,

Tier 15 structural load rating.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated; refer also to Section “Low-

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”:

1. For allowable indoor raceways and MC Cable, refer to Section 260519.

2.

3.

4.

Indoor conduit: EMT with compression fittings.

Exposed raceway in public spaces: surface metallic raceway.

Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5.

6.

Damp or Wet Locations or in Kitchens: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.

Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air:

EMT.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260533 – Page 6 # 1397

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Use die-cast compression fittings.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

I.

J.

Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than

200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic, as follows:

1. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless

Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

# 1397 Section 260533 – page 7

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1.

2.

Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1.

2.

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07

Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07

Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 260533 – Page 8 # 1397

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1.

2.

Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

# 1397 Section 260553 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.

Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.

Underground-line warning tape.

Warning labels and signs.

Instruction signs.

Equipment identification labels.

Miscellaneous identification products.

Custom labels for all receptacle and switch faceplates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the

Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and

Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260553 – page 2 # 1397

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:

1.

2.

3.

Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.

Emergency Circuits: Black letters on a red field.

Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches

(50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION

MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by

1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick.

Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

Embedded continuous metallic strip or core (detectable).

Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

# 1397 Section 260553 – page 3

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1.

2.

3.

Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum.

Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).

Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service and Feeders: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260553 – page 4 # 1397

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands or snap-around, color-coding bands:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Fire Alarm System: Red.

Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.

Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.

Security System: Blue and yellow.

Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.

Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.

Control Wiring: Green and red.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape and aluminum wraparound marker labels. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For all conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.

D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. For all conditions (more than one conductor in a box), identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1.

2.

3.

Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with

29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

I.

J.

1. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

# 1397 Section 260553 – page 5 terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions: a. b. c.

Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-

1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

Electrical switchgear and switchboards.

Transformers.

Electrical substations.

Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. h. i. j.

Motor-control centers.

Disconnect switches.

Enclosed circuit breakers.

Motor starters and drives. k. l.

Push-button stations.

Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. s. t. u. v. o. p. q. r.

Battery inverter units.

Battery racks.

Power-generating units.

Voice and data cable terminal equipment.

Master clock and program equipment.

Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations.

Television/audio components, racks, and controls.

Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. w. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and racks. x. y.

Monitoring and control equipment.

Uninterruptible power supply equipment. z. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions. aa. Receptacles and switches, including panel source and circuit number. Minimum 10 pt font.

See 3.2.K below for additional requirements.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260553 – page 6 # 1397

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1.

2.

Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied.

Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

3. a. b. c.

Phase A: Black.

Phase B: Red.

Phase C: Blue.

Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

4. a. b. c.

Phase A: Brown.

Phase B: Orange.

Phase C: Yellow.

Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches

(400 mm) overall.

J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections.

K. For all Receptacles and switches, provide the following labeling: Provide clear, self adhesive label on all faceplates with minimum 10 pt black lettering identifying the panel source and circuit number.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

# 1397 Section 260923 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Indoor occupancy sensors.

2. Wall dimmers.

3. Lighting control systems with dimmer cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C. Shop drawings for lighting control and dimmer system:

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring vs. factory wiring.

2. Dimmer schedule.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260923 – page 2 # 1397

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Hubbell Building Automation

Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.

Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.

Novitas, Inc.

RAB Lighting, Inc.

Sensor Switch, Inc.

TORK.

Watt Stopper (The).

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at

120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

Mounting:

5.

6.

7. a. b. c.

Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.

Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.

1.

2.

Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).

Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

# 1397 Section 260923 – page 3

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.

F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches

(305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m).

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1.

2.

3.

Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

Provide the following detectors for each specific room type:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

General Rooms and Corridors: Provide quantity as indicated on the drawings, Hubbell

OMNIDT2000RP ceiling mounted dual technology sensors with (1) Hubbell UVPP power pack for each sensor.

Small Offices: Provide quantity as indicated on the drawings, Hubbell OMNIDT500RP ceiling mounted dual technology sensor with (1) Hubbell UVPP power pack for each sensor.

Rooms with Wall Mount Sensor (single level control): Provide quantity as indicated on drawings,

Hubbell LHMTD2 Ultrasonic and PIR Dual Circuit Wall Switch Sensor with IntellADAPT and

Automatic/Manual Control, 120/277VAC

Rooms with Wall Mount Sensor (dual level control): Provide quantity as indicated on drawings,

Hubbell LHIRD2 Passive Infrared Dual Circuit Wall Switch Sensor with IntellADAPT and

Automatic/Manual Control, 120/277VAC.

Rooms with less than 60W load: Watt Stopper WS-200 with Load Requirements @ 120VAC,

60Hz: 0-800W ballast & tungsten.

2.2 WALL DIMMER SWITCHES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260923 – page 4 # 1397

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Leviton (Basis of Design)

Lutron

Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.

Cooper Lighting Controls

Sensor Switch, Inc.

Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Architectural wallbox 0-10V dimmer with slider and ON/OFF button, equal to the Leviton

Renoir II series.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Switch shall be universal voltage (120-277V) rated.

Switch shall provide multi-location dimming and/or ON/OFF control from remote location.

Switch shall have thin heat sink profile.

Switch shall have field configurable cut-off level.

Switch shall have power-failure memory, surge protection, electrostatic discharge protection, and square law dimming.

Switch shall be approved for use with 0-10V LED dimming fixtures.

7.

8.

9.

Switch shall be equal to Leviton #AWSMT-7DW.

Remote switches (3-way & 4-way installation) shall be equal to #AWWRT-00W.

Provide wall plates as needed for single gang and double gang installations.

C. Description: Architectural wallbox Electronic Low-Voltage (ELV) dimmer with slider and ON/OFF button, equal to the Leviton Renoir II series.

1. Switch shall be universal voltage (120-277V) rated.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Switch shall provide multi-location dimming and/or ON/OFF control from remote location.

Switch shall have thin heat sink profile.

Switch shall have field configurable cut-off level.

Switch shall have power-failure memory, surge protection, electrostatic discharge protection, and

6.

7.

8. square law dimming.

Switch shall be approved for use with Electronic Low Voltage LED dimming fixtures.

Switch shall be equal to Leviton #AWRMG-EBW.

Provide wall plates as needed for single gang and double gang installations.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM AND DIMMER RACKS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. Leviton (Basis of Design)

2.

3.

4.

ETC.

Crestron.

Acuity Lighting Control

B. Architectural Lighting Control Stations:

1.

2.

3.

Sapphire 7” LCD Touch Screen with faceplate a. Control remote and auxiliary dimming and switching loads

Addressable

Electrical Input a. +9-24VDC, 75 mA b. c.

Peripheral Network Power: +24VDC, 150 mA

Separate Class I (high voltage) and Class II PELV wiring

NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

# 1397 Section 260923 – page 5

4.

5.

6.

7. d. Suitable for use with Advance Transformer Mark X ballasts

Internal Time clock a. Continue to keep time for at least two weeks without external power

Store scenes in non-volatile memory

Programmable password security a. Provide multi-level electronic password locks

1) User Preset Scene information

2) Setup and configuration

3) Station User Lockout

Provide a terminal strip for connection to an external keyswitch a. Keyswitch to have configurable functionality

Connect directly to low voltage occupancy sensors 8.

9. a. Occupancy sensors configurable to activate and/or de-activate user-programmed scenes

External Trigger a. Provide auxiliary input to trigger any scene b. Optionally, lock Master station

10. Controls a. Backlit LCD display b. c. d. e. f. g.

1) Provide a visible menu-driven user interface for programming and operation

2) Two (2) lines of sixteen (16) characters

3) LED backlit a) Electro-luminescent backlighting not acceptable

4) Display relevant information including preset status, illumination levels in percent, time of day

Eight (8) Scene Buttons

1) Automatically illuminate to indicate currently selected Scene

LED bar-graphs

1) Display illumination level for eight (8) Scenes

Raise and Lower pushbuttons next to each LED bar-graph

1) Allow manual over-ride without modifying programmed scenes a) b)

Allow operator to bring any Zone to 100% illumination instantly by pressing the Raise pushbutton twice

Allow operator to turn any Zone Off instantly by pressing the Lower pushbutton twice

Numerical indicators above each bar-graph

1) Indicate zone being controlled for Groups 1 and 2 only

INFO button above each bar-graph

1) Display alphanumeric Zone label and illumination level on LCD

Buttons

1) Page: Select among four (4) groups of eight (8) zones

2) MAX: 100% illumination, all Zones

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260923 – page 6 # 1397

3) OFF: All Zones Off

11. Air-gap Off switch to eliminate shock hazards when servicing a. Accessible on the face

12. Infrared Receiver - Compatible with Leviton remote controls

13. Physical a. Fit within a 5-gang box, 2.5 inches deep with a ¾-inch 4-gang device cover b. Faceplate

1) Seamless, showing no visible means of wall connection

2) Available in white, ivory, almond, gray, and black

3) Available with translucent cover available so that LEDs remain visible when cover is down

4) Blank stainless steel

14. Environmental a. b.

Operating Temperature Range: 0ºC to +40ºC.

Relative Humidity: 20% to 90% non-condensing.

15. Non-Volatile Memory a. b. c.

Provide a 20-year warranty

Store all system settings

Ensure that all lights return automatically to currently set levels following a power interruption

16. Remote Wall Stations a. Physical:

1) Mount in a standard 1 gang, 2-1/4 inch deep back box a) Capable of being gang mounted with other remote stations to access up to b. c. d. thirty-two (32) scenes

2) Color: White

Controls:

1) Buttons: Backlit to indicate current preset or control selection

2) Labels

Applied in the field as customized: For example Worship, Choir, A/V, etc. a)

Configurations

1) Provide the following as shown on the drawings: a) b)

Five (5) button stations with infrared receivers

Four Scene Station Leviton p/n D42P4-00W: select Scenes 1 through 4 and

OFF

Furnish each station complete with a faceplate:

1)

Leviton “Decora Plus” finish as selected by the Architect.

C. Dimming Systems:

1. Dimming Performance Requirements a. Design dimmers to operate continuously in ambient temperatures ranging from 0° C (32°F) to 40° C (104°F) with up to 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. b. c. d. e.

All dimming electronics to employ Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs)

Provide a means to disconnect the load from line supply when user needs to service the load.

Return lights to previously set levels when power is restored following an interruption.

Control all light sources in a smooth and continuous fashion without visible steps.

1) Smoothly change illumination levels to programmed settings within 350µs.

NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

# 1397 Section 260923 – page 7

2.

2) Each dimmer rated to 20A continuous operation

3) Each dimmer slot to have assignable, field-configurable load types with corresponding dimming curves and ranges.

4) Incandescent

5) Quartz

6) Quartz halogen

7) Tungsten Argon

8) Magnetic Low Voltage

9) Electronic Low Voltage f. g. a) Subject to dimmer manufacturer evaluation

10) Low power factor neon and cold cathode transformers

11) Two-Wire Fluorescent Ballasts

12) Three Wire Dimming LED Drivers(100%-1%)

Each dimmer to have programmable minimum and maximum light levels.

Each dimmer to have a programmable cutoff level.

Leviton A-2000 Series Dimmer Panels a. General

1) Capacity b. a) 12 (dual) dimmer modules (24-circuit): Factory-configured

2) Enable dimmer module installation and replacement without re-wiring

3) Hard-wired dimmer modules are not acceptable

4) Accept the following control signals: a) LumaNet III b) c)

DMX512

0 — 10 VDC analog: Via optional analog control card

5) Automatically recognize and support the following dimmer module types: a) b)

Dual Dimmer Module

Constant Module c) d)

High Rise-Time Module

Dual Universal Module

Physical: c. d.

1) NEMA Type 1 indoor enclosure

2) 14 gauge steel

3) Mount in standard stud walls, fitting between two standard stud spacings

4) Surface mountable: When surface mounted, meet ADA (Americans With

Disabilities Act) requirements

5) Flush mountable with optional flush mount trim kit

Electrical:

1) Main input power: three-phase 208 VAC

2) Available with main circuit breakers or main lugs: Main lugs sized to allow every dimmer module to be loaded to maximum capacity

3) Supply + 24 VDC power to networked control stations

4) Provide eight (8) 0 — 10 VDC analog output channels

Digital control electronics

1) Functions: a) b)

Display system operating status

Identify errors and malfunctions

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260923 – page 8 # 1397 c) d)

Configure dimmer modules

Assign network addresses to dimmer modules

2) Front Panel LCD display: Display software version, main feed status and phase unless Function buttons are engaged a) Function Buttons: b) c) d)

Full Bright:

Push once to override all assigned dimmers to full brightness

Push twice to release and return dimmers to external control e) f)

Dimmers can be assigned to respond to external Full Bright commands for emergency functions

Select / Save: Display incoming voltage and frequency of all AC power e. g) phases on LCD

Cancel / Clear: Display software version, main feed status and phase on

LCD

3) LED Indicators a) Phase Loss: indicates low voltage or loss on any phase of the main feed b) c)

Full Bright: indicates that the panel is operating in Full Bright mode

FAN: indicates that power is present at the fan motor(s) d) AUX, DMX, LUMANET: indicate control signals are being received by blinking

4) Navigation buttons a) Up, Down, Left, Right

Panel Control Software

1) Programmable from front panel LCD, Navigation, Select / Save and Cancel / Clear buttons

2) Assign LumaNet and / or DMX512 channels to dimmer modules

3) Configure features common to all dimmer types: a) Full Bright Input: Toggles On/Off override to Full Bright from the front b) panel

External Full Bright: Toggles On/Off override to Full Bright from an external contact: Assignable to any network channel c) d) e) f) g) h) i)

Control input source:

Scan All (A)

EXT Full Bright

Full Bright

Analog

Luma-Net

DMX512

4) DMX 512 Address: Sets the DMX address for that particular circuit (1 — 512)

5) Luma-Net Address: Sets the Luma-Net address for that particular circuit (1 —

2048)

6) Dimmer Feedback for Luma-Net on or off.

7) Max and Min Levels

8) Assign analog input: If applicable

9) Assign Photocell

10) Dimmer configurations: a) b) c)

Curve:

Square Law

Linear Voltage

NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

# 1397 Section 260923 – page 9

3. d) e) f)

Linear Lights

Cutoff level for specific load types:

Non-Dim g) h) i) j) k)

Mark X (10)

Mark VII (7)

Low Voltage Magnetic

Lutron Tu-Wire™

HiLume™

11) Associate with one of (8) 0-10VDC low voltage control outputs a) Control ballasts that require a 0-10VDC control signal (Mark VII or similar) without requiring an additional external interface

Leviton A-2000 Dimmer Modules: a.

Dual Universal Module Leviton p/n’s 000-A20UN-012(120V), -027 (120/277V) b. Programmable for the following load types:

1) DM: suitable for incandescent lamps, quartz halogen lamps, stepdown transformers for low voltage incandescent lamps, and neon or cold cathode low power factor type transformers c.

2) M7: suitable for dimming ballasts requiring that the 120 V power be turned on and off, and controlled by a 0 — 10 V signal

3) Maximum capacity of 100 ballasts per circuit

4) TU: suitable for Lutron TuWire dimming ballasts

5) MX: suitable for Advance Mark X dimming ballasts

6) ND: switched On/Off operation

7) LV: suitable for low-voltage stepdown transformers and other loads that require a low-end cutoff a) Subject to dimmer manufacturer evaluation: transformer must incorporate thermal protection or have a fused primary winding.

8) HL: suitable for Lutron HiLume 3-wire LED Dimming Drivers

Universal Module

1)

Normal mode: Red LED unlit; SCR’s and relays operated by control module

2)

Bypass mode: Red LED illuminated; SCR’s and relays are forced On

D. Commissioning:

1. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to ensure proper system installation and operation under following parameters: a. b.

Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.

Site visit activities: c.

1) Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.

2) Verify connection of controls.

3) Verify system operation control by control, circuit by circuit.

4) Obtain sign-off on system functions.

5)

Demonstrate system capabilities, operation and maintenance and educate Owner’s representative on the foregoing.

At least three site visits to accomplish the following tasks:

1) Prior to wiring a) b) c) d)

Review and provide installer with instructions to correct any errors in the following areas:

Low voltage wiring requirements

Separation of high and low voltage wiring runs

Wire labeling

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260923 – page 10 #

1397 e) f) g)

Load schedule information

Switching cabinet locations and installation

Physical locations and network addresses of controls h) i) j) k) l)

Ethernet connectivity

Computer-to-network connections

Load circuit wiring

Connections to other systems and equipment

Placement and adjustment of Photocells

2) After system installation a) Check and approve or provide correction instructions on the following: b) c) d) e) f)

Connections of power feeds and load circuits

Connections and locations of controls

Connections of low voltage inputs

Connections of the data network

Turn on system control processor and upload any pre-programmed system configuration

Verify cabinet address(es)

Upload pre-programmed system configuration and information to switching g) h) i) j) k) l) and/or dimming cabinets

Check load currents and remove bypass jumpers

Verify that each system control is operating to specification

Verify that each system circuit is operational according to specification

Verify that manufacturers’ interfacing equipment is operating to specification m) Verify that any computers and software supplied by the manufacturer are performing to specifications

2.

3.

4. n) o)

Verify that any remote WAN (Wide Area Network) connections are operating properly

Have an owner’s representative sign off on the above-listed system functions

3) Before project completion and hand-off a) b) c)

Demonstrate system capabilities and functions to owner’s representative

Train owner’s representative on the proper operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the system.

Modify system programming based on Owner’s final input.

Notification: Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall notify the manufacturer that the system is ready for formal checkout. Notification shall be given in writing a minimum of 21 days prior to the time factory-trained personnel are required on site. Each field installed RJ45 connection must be tested prior to system interconnection. A test report must be furnished to manufacturer prior to scheduling commissioning activity. Manufacturer shall have the option to waive formal turn-on.

Turn-On: Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all fixtures are installed and lamped, Manufacturer’s Certified Technician shall completely check the installation prior to energizing the system. Each installed relay system shall be tested for proper ON/OFF operations, and proper LED illumination. Each installed control cabinet shall be tested verifying that each controlled load adjusts to the selected setting and that all switch LED’s illuminate properly.

At the time of checkout and testing, the owner’s representative shall be thoroughly instructed in the proper operation of the system.

NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

Section 260923 – page 11 # 1397

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

1.

2.

Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1.

2.

After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES NEWARK UMC - ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 260923 – page 12 #

1397

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide one visit to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Provide minimum of 4-hours of training on a day and time coordinated with the Owner. Assume training will take place outside of normal business hours do to volunteer personnel. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS PANELBOARDS

# 1397 Section 262416 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

B. Requirements specified in all other sections of Division 26 apply to this Section.

SUMMARY:

A. Extent of panelboard, load-center and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes, is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein.

B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following:

1. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Refer to other Division-26 sections for wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work required in conjunction with installation of panelboards and enclosures.

D. Wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways required in conjunction with the installation of panelboards and enclosures are specified in other Division-26 sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures.

1.4

B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for panelboards showing connections to electrical power feeders and distribution branches.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing panelboards similar to those required for this project.

B. Codes and Standards:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as applicable to installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures.

UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards," and

UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories and enclosures.

Provide panelboard units which are UL-listed and labeled.

Special-Use Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special-use, with appropriate UL markings which indicate that they are suitable for special type of use/application.

NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)," Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards," and Pub/No. PB

PANELBOARDS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 262416 - Page 2 #1397

1.1,"Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less."

1.5

C. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with FS W-P-115, "Power Distribution Panel", pertaining to panelboards and accessories.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with installation of wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products manufactured by:

1.

2.

3.

Square D Co.

General Electric Co.

Cutler- Hammer / Eaton Electrical

2.2 PANELBOARDS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated.

B. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with

Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices," with OCPDs adapted to panelboard installation.

Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multipole breakers shall have common trip.

C. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to box.

D. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.

E. Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.

F. Double-Main Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated. Provide custom sizes separate from the integral main circuit breakers with internal factory wiring from the double main lugs to the integral main circuit breaker.

G. Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as indicated.

1. Split Bus: Vertical bus of indicated panels divided into two vertical sections with connections as indicated. Provide split bus panels for Normal -Emergency Loads, where indicated.

Contactors in Panels: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and connections as indicated. 2.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

PANELBOARDS

Section 262416 – page 3

H. All panelboards and distribution boards:

1. Provide both enclosure fronts and doors with full piano type hinges.

2. Provide phase color code chart as required by the NEC.

3. Provide Arc Flash labeling to comply with the NEC.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Branch-Circuit Breakers: Use bolt-on breakers.

1. Power Distribution Panelboards General: Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98percent conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide molded-case main and branch circuitbreaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiplepole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards. Provide enclosure fronts and doors with full piano type hinges.

B. Distribution panelboards shall be equal to Eaton Electrical 1a, 3a or 4B Power Distribution Panelboards.

Power Distribution Panelboards shall be rated minimum 18,000 Ampere R.M.S. Symmetrical, for the

120/208 Volt panelboards, or as shown in the drawings.

C. The corresponding feeder circuit breaker located in the Power Distribution Panelboards or switchboards may provide series rating for the downstream lighting or and/or power panelboards, rated minimum

10,000 Ampere R.M.S. Symmetrical, for the 120/208V panels.

D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with full piano hinge, and doors with flush locks, piano hinge and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated.

Equip with interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting, where indicated.

Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

E. Surge Protective Device (SPD): Provide service entrance SPD units equal to Eaton CPS100-208Y-S-A

100kA integral unit to the panelboard (bus connected).

2.4

F. MDP Main Breaker: Molded case breaker with solid state trip devices: Equal to Eaton M-Frame breaker with Digitrip 310 electronic trip unit.

LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards General: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel; equip with copper bus bars, full-sized

PANELBOARDS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 262416 - Page 4 #1397 neutral bar, with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit-breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; and provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards.

1. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and

NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with piano hinge, and doors with piano hinge, flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed. Provide enclosure fronts and doors with full piano type hinges.

C. Double-Width Panels: Where more than 42 poles are indicated or where otherwise indicated, provide two panelboards connected by feed-thru lugs. Contractor shall provide wire and conduit between panels equal to the main incoming feeders.

D. Doors: In panel front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed alike.

E. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.

F. Panelboards shall be made by Eaton Electrical Type 1a. Panelboards shall be rated minimum 10,000

Ampere R.M.S. Symmetrical for the 120/208V panelboards. Series rated panelboards, equipped with suitable circuit breakers, rated minimum 10,000 Ampere R.M.S. Symmetrical, and protected by the corresponding feeder circuit breaker located in the Main Distribution Switchboards and\or in the

Distribution Panels are acceptable.

G. All single pole circuit breakers installed in kitchen panels with the exception of breakers feeding refrigeration equipment and lighting shall be equipped with ground fault protection. All circuits in the kitchen supplying equipment located under / associated with the hood shall have circuit breakers equipped with shunt trip coils.

H. Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, timedelay type fuses, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.

I. Special Features:

1. Provide panel mounted remote control switches as indicated.

2. Provide enclosure fronts with full piano hinges and doors within the fronts with full piano hinges.

Secure fronts with standard manufacturer fastening devices.

2.5 PANEL INSTALLED REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

# 1397

PANELBOARDS

Section 262416 – page 5

A. General: Provide in the new panelboard, where indicated, new Remote Control Switches (Contactors) as describe hereafter and indicated in the drawings.

B. Remote Control Switches: Provide panelboard mounted remote control switches as indicated. Remote control switches shall be single throw, rated for all classes of loads (motor loads and for 100% High

Intensity Discharged Lighting), mechanically held, electromagnetically operated. Remote control switches shall be 100 % rated, and have minimum 300 % interrupting capacity at 50 % power factor.

Remote Control Switches shall be equipped for two wire 120 Volt control (Accessory 47). Remote control switches shall be ASCO 920 type - 120/208 Volt rated minimum 60 Amperes or as shown in the drawings, equipped with accessories # 47 and fully rated neutral pole. When the drawings indicates four

(4); five (5); six (6); and etc. pole remote control switches, provide multiple two and/or three pole remote control switches to accomplish the required controls. In the event that an UL label can not be secured for the panel, or the panel equipped with the remote control switch can not be install in the allotted space, furnish remote control switches installed in a separate NEMA 1 enclosure located next to or above the panelboard. Provide necessary over-current protection for the contactors.

2.6 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES INSTALLED IN NEMA I ENCLOSURES:

A. General: Provide Remote Control Switches (Contactors) installed in NEMA I enclosure as describe for panel mounted installation.

B. Remote Control Switches (Contactors): Provide individually mounted remote control switches. Remote control switches shall be single throw, rated for all classes of loads (motor loads and for 100% High

Intensity Discharged Lighting), mechanically held, electromagnetically operated. Remote control switches shall be 100 % rated, and have minimum 300 % interrupting capacity at 50 % power factor.

Remote Control Switches shall be equipped for two wire 120 Volt control (Accessory 47). Remote control switches shall be ASCO 920 type - 120/208 Volt - rated as shown in the drawings, equipped with accessories # 47 and fully rated neutral pole. When the drawings indicates four (4); five (5); or six (6) pole remote control switches, provide multiple two and/or three pole remote control switches to accomplish the required controls. Install switches either in common or individual NEMA I enclosures.

Multiple remote control switches shall have a common two wire control circuit. Equip each contactor with a local control station (ASCO-173A3) located on the facia of the panel or contactor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

3.2

A. Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify

Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS:

A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standards of Installation," and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters."

C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

PANELBOARDS NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 262416 - Page 6 #1397 manufacturer's published torque values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B.

D. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically anchored.

E. Provide properly wired electrical connections for panelboards within enclosures.

F. Fill out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.

3.3

G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space.

GROUNDING:

3.4

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.

B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and phase-toground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

3.5

C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

3.6

B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.

DEMONSTRATION:

A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS WIRING DEVICES

# 1397 Section 262726 – page 1

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 26.

1.2

B. Requirements specified in all other sections of Division 26 apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Receptacles

Plugs and Plug Connectors

Snap Switches

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

Wall Plates

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification" for requirements for legends to be engraved on wall plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified.

1.4

B. Samples of those products indicated for sample submission in Architect's comments on product data submittal. Include color and finish samples of device plates and other items per Architect's request.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes.

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".

1. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hubbell Inc.

WIRING DEVICES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 262726 – page 2 # 1397

2. Leviton.

3. Pass and Seymour Inc.

2.2 WIRING DEVICES:

A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Provide ivory color devices except as otherwise indicated. Verify color selections with Architect.

B. Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1. Where not otherwise indicated, provide 20A specification grade receptacles. Provide receptacles equal to Hubbell Wiring Devices HBL5352I.

C. Tamper Resistant Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1. Where not otherwise indicated, provide 20A commercial specification grade receptacles. Provide receptacles equal to Hubbell Wiring

Devices BR20ITR.

D. Receptacles, Industrial Heavy Duty: Provide pin and sleeve design receptacles conforming to UL 498.

Provide features indicated.

E. Ground-Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: As indicated in Table 1 in Part 3 below; provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupter, with integral heavy-duty NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide unit designed for installation in a

2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 94.3 and

2006 UL requirements. Receptacles shall be weather and tamper resistant to comply with 2008 NEC requirements. Provide receptacles equal to Hubbell Wiring Devices GFTR20IU.

F. Surge Protective Device (SPD) or TVSS Receptacles: NEMA 5-20R surge suppression receptacle with

LED light, 240 joules/15000A per mode. Provide TVSS receptacle equal to Hubbell Wiring Devices

HBL5360SA.

G. Isolated Ground (IG) Receptacles: NEMA 5-20R isolated ground receptacle. Provide IG receptacle equal to Hubbell Wiring Devices IG5362.

H. Plugs: 15-amperes, 125-volts, 3-wire, grounding, armored cap plugs, parallel blades with cord clamp, and 0.4 inch cord hole; match NEMA configuration with power source's.

I. Plug Connectors: 15-amperes, 125-volts, bakelite-body armored connectors, 3-wire, grounding, parallel blades, double wipe contact, with cord clamp, and 0.4 inch cord hole, match NEMA configuration to mating plug's. Arrange as indicated.

J. Snap Switches: quiet type AC switches as indicated in Table 2 in Part 3 below. Comply with UL 20 and

NEMA WD1. Where not otherwise indicated, provide 20A industrial/institutional heavy duty grade switches. Provide switches equal to Hubbell Wiring Devices 1221I.

2.3

K. Pin & Sleeve: 3-phase, 208V, 60A industrial duty receptacles by Hubbell or approved equal to match existing units on existing racks.

WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wall plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal screws for securing

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS WIRING DEVICES

# 1397 Section 262726 – page 3 plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices except as otherwise indicated. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated.

Conform to requirements of Section "Electrical Identification." Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

1. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel, typical for all power, computer, telephone, CATV, etc. jacks in the project, except for where located in 5400 Series

Wiremold.

2. Material for Wet Locations: Cast Aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." Provide gray while-in-use cover WP26M by Hubbell Wiring Devices or approved equal.

3.1

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES:

A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

E. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.

F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

3.2 PROTECTION

3.3

A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.

B. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 262726 – page 4 # 1397

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

# 1397

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Section 265100 – page 1

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division - 1 Specification Section, apply to work of this Section.

B. All the requirements of all the Division 26 Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Extent, location, and details of lighting fixture work are indicated on drawings and in schedules.

B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following:

1. Fluorescent.

2. LED.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each type interior and exterior building lighting fixture and component.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of lighting fixtures and their spatial relationship to each other.

In addition, submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in "laminar type" alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Drawings shall indicate complete details of fixture, including manufacturer's catalog numbers for sockets, ballasts, lamps, lightshields, lenses, metal gauges, type of wiring, finish color and texture. Ceiling system shop drawings shall indicate relationship between fixture and adjacent elements of structure (walls, columns, ducts, openings, etc.) Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system.

D. Note for Product Data and Shop Drawing submittals: The shop drawings will be immediately rejected if specific ballasts and lamps, as well as the other data indicated above, are not provided.

E. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for auditorium lighting showing connections to electrical power panels, switches, dimmers, controllers, and feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer-installed and portions which are field-installed.

F. A contractor submitted shop drawing for the lighting fixtures, stamped as Approved by the contractor, constitutes that the contractor has reviewed, coordinated and approved all information (number and quantity of switching devices, ceiling types, wiring schemes, etc.) on the Electrical and Architectural drawings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 265100 – page 2 # 1397

B. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 410, and 510 as applicable to installation, and

2.

3.

4.

5. construction of building lighting fixtures.

NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub/No.'s LE 1 and

LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment.

IES Compliance.

UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards, including UL 486A and B, pertaining to lighting fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures and components which are UL-listed and labeled.

CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast

Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warrant the completed lighting system wiring, equipment, lamps and ballasts to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of

Substantial Completion. Refer to Division 01 specifications for definition of Substantial Completion.

B. Contractors shall note that all equipment warranties, as described in the various sections of the

Specifications, will begin after Substantial Completion. It will not make any difference when equipment is ordered, delivered or installed, warranties will commence after the Architect issues his letter of

“Substantial Completion.”

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage.

B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.

1.7

C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work. Coordinate depth of all lighting fixtures, to eliminate interference with all equipment above the ceiling, with mechanical contractor and general contractor

B. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction.

1.8 GENERAL

A. Furnish lighting fixtures, lighting equipment components, branch circuiting and lamps for a complete lighting system. All incandescent fixtures shall be prewired type.

B. The ballast and all other parts shall be considered as components of the fixture, and it shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer of the fixture to furnish labor and material required to repair or replace any or all of the components that become defective during the guarantee period stated in this specification.

971

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

# 1397 Section 265100 – page 3

C. Refer to Architectural Finish Schedules and Details for type of new ceiling construction. Furnish fixtures and accessories to suit. Furnish, fixtures, supports and other accessories to suit ceiling construction.

Fixture catalog numbers do not necessarily denote specific mounting accessories for the type of ceilings the fixture may be installed in.

D. Location of fixtures on drawings is diagrammatic. Verify locations with reflected ceiling plans, or other reference data for final location and spacing in advance of installation. Examine space conditions and requirements for installation of fixtures. Coordinate installation of fixtures with other trades to avoid interferences.

E. Where gypsum board or plaster ceiling occur, supply plaster frames for settings. Coordinate setting and be responsible for correct location; make sure bottom of frame is flush with finished ceiling. Fixtures shall be supported by plaster frames utilizing yokes or leveling lugs. Yokes shall have channel crosssection of approved gauge, and shall support fixture by means of not less than two bolts each.

F. Wiring channels and socket mountings shall be rigid and accurately made. Sockets shall hold lamps securely against normal vibration and maintenance handling. Socket contacts shall be silver plated. For rapid start lamps on single ballasts, furnish one grounding socket.

G. Provide approved support for each lighting fixture outlet. Provide Hurricain Clips to the ACT ceiling, if not available provide 2 points of support from each fixture to the structure above.

H. For pendant-mounted fixtures furnish adjustable ball joint type hangers.

I. Blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory fixtures shall be replaced at the direction of the Architect.

J. Reflector cones, aperture plates, and decorative elements of fixtures shall not be installed until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting, and general clean-up in the area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or alternatives of the quality necessary to meet the specifications.

2.2 FIXTURES:

A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to, housings, energy- efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring.

Ship fixtures factory-assembled, with those components required for a complete installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise. All High Intensity Discharge fixtures shall be equipped with high impact glass lenses.

B. Normal/Standard Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Provide 120/277 universal voltage, lowenergy, high-frequency electronic fluorescent lamp ballasts, capable of operating lamp types indicated.

Ballasts shall be by Osram-Sylvania or equal by GE/Magnetek or Advance Ballast – no exceptions will be allowed.

1. The electronic ballast shall be provided with integral leads, color coded to ANSI standard

C82.11(latest version).

2. Ballast Type: Programmed Start, universal voltage.

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 265100 – page 4 # 1397

3.

4.

5.

The electronic ballast’s input current shall have a “Total Harmonic Distortion” (THD) of less than

10% when used with primary lamp.

The electronic ballast shall have a “Power Factor” greater than 98% when used with primary lamp.

The electronic ballast shall have a ballast factor of .88.

6. The electronic ballast shall have a noise rating (Class A) or better.

7. Ballast shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania QUICKTRONIC® PROStart® PSN T8 Universal

Voltage.

C. Emergency Inverter Ballasts

1. Where indicated in the fixture schedule, provide emergency inverter ballasts by Bodine equal to

B50 for 2 lamps and with minimum 1300 total initial lumen output. Ballasts shall be wired to (2) of the lamps in the fixture.

D. Lamps – Lamp manufacturer shall match the ballast manufacturer or the lamp/ballast

combination shall provide a warranty equal to the Osram-Sylvania QUICK 60+®.

1. Provide and install lamps for each fixture on the project and replace burned-out lamps throughout

2. the warranty period. Lamps shall be by Osram-Sylvania or equal by GE or Philips.

Provide 4’ and U-tube T8 fluorescent lamps with the following characteristics: T8-32W, minimum 85 CRI, 3000K, minimum 36,000 (24,000 for U-tubes) hours average rated life @ 3 hours per start and 2945 mean lumens @ 25 degrees C. Lamps shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania

Octron FO32/830/XPS/ECO.

3. Provide 4’ T8 fluorescent lamps with the following characteristics: T8-28W, minimum 85 CRI,

3000K, minimum 46,000 hours average rated life @ 3 hours per start and 2522 mean lumens @ 25

4. degrees C. Lamps shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania Octron FO28/830XP/XL/SS/ECO3.

Provide compact fluorescent lamps with the following characteristics: 4-pin lamp for electronic and dimming ballasts with end-of-life protection (EOL), various wattages, minimum 82 CRI,

3000K and minimum 12,000 hours average rated life. Lamps shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania

Dulux T/E/IN Amalgam, 4-pin, T4 compact fluorescent lamps.

5. Provide biax compact fluorescent lamps with the following characteristics: L lamp for electronic

6. and dimming ballasts with end-of-life protection (EOL), various wattages, minimum 82 CRI,

3000K and minimum 12,000 hours average rated life. Lamps shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania

Dulux L High Lumen, T5 compact fluorescent lamps.

Provide 4’ T5 fluorescent lamps with the following characteristics: T5-54W, minimum 85 CRI,

3000K, minimum 25,000 hours average rated life and 4140 mean lumens @ 25 degrees C. Lamps

7. shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania Octron FP54/830/HO/ECO.

Provide 4’ T5 fluorescent lamps with the following characteristics: T5-28W, minimum 85 CRI,

3000K, minimum 20,000 hours average rated life and 2418 mean lumens @ 25 degrees C. Lamps shall be equal to Osram-Sylvania Octron FP28/830/ECO.

E. Lighting Fixture Schedule:

1.

2.

3.

General: Various fixture types required are indicated below. Fixtures must comply with minimum requirements as stated herein. Review architectural drawings and specifications to verify ceiling types, modules, suspension systems appropriate to installation. In general, where so noted, substitutions for different type of fixture will be acceptable, based only on the alternate manufacturer listed for the specific fixture type, and on objective criteria as submitted in accordance with Instructions to the Bidders.

A contractor submitted shop drawing for the lighting fixtures, stamped as Approved by the contractor, constitutes that the contractor has reviewed, coordinated and approved all information

(number and quantity of switching devices, ceiling types, wiring schemes, etc.) on the Electrical and Architectural drawings.

Model numbers are shown for information only. The written description for each fixture shall supersede the model number. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to verify all

971

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

# 1397 Section 265100 – page 5

model numbers. All final fixture finishes shall be selected by the Architect prior to fixture

approval. Contractor shall bid on the most expensive finish available for each fixture, unless otherwise noted.

4.

FIXTURE TYPE “A1”: 2’ x 2’ high performance recessed LED lighting fixture with minimum

4300 lumens and a 120/277V integral 0-10V dimming driver, 3000K CCT, at approximately 60W.

Fixtures shall have an angled diffuser system with diffuse center optics, shall be a maximum of 4” in depth, and be UL Listed. Fixture shall be rated L70 of minimum 50,000 hours, and minimum

5-year warranty. Fixture shall be Finelite HPR-LED-A-2X2-DCO-HO-3000K-120-SC-XX or

5. approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

FIXTURE TYPE “A2”: Same as fixture type “A1”, except fixture shall provide a minimum 3100 lumens with a 120/277V integral 0-10V dimming driver, 3000K CCT, at approximately 37W.

Fixtures shall have an angled diffuser system with diffuse center optics, shall be a maximum of 4” in depth, and be UL Listed. Fixture shall be rated L70 of minimum 50,000 hours, and minimum

5-year warranty. Fixture shall be Finelite HPR-LED-A-2X2-DCO-SO-3000K-120-SC-XX or approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

6.

FIXTURE TYPE “B1”: 48” long linear asymmetric distribution surface mounted LED floodlighting fixture. Fixture shall provide minimum 4500 lumens at 3000K CCT and approximately 60W, with integral 120/277V electronic driver and surge protection. Fixture shall be rated for operation down to -22F. Fixture shall be Fixture shall be constructed of die-cast and extruded aluminum housing, Wet Location listed and IP65 rated with silicone gasketing, extruded

UV-stablized acrylic lens, and stainless steel tamper resistant hardware. Fixture shall be provided with very short adjustable (200 degree rotation) wall mount arms, end caps, and wall plates.

Fixture shall be able to be wired through the arms are fixture end caps. Final fixture color shall be as selected by the Architect. Fixture shall be AAL Lighting PV2830D-48-XXX-HB- or approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

7.

FIXTURE TYPE “C1”: 16” diameter pendant fixture, with single vertical stem. Fixture shall be provided with (2) 26W quad CFL lamps and integral 120/277V electronic ballast. Fixture shall have matte white acrylic bowl diffuser with solid aluminum spun double trim ring. Fixture shall have maximum height of 21”. Final fixture finish and glass color to be selected by Architect.

Fixture shall be OCL RF1-P1AE-16-MW-XXX-2QD26-120-21 or approved equal by Philips

Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

8.

FIXTURE TYPE “D1”: 7” round surface mount LED downlight. Fixture shall be designed to mount directly on standard 4” junction box. Fixture shall provide approximately 1000 lumens at

3000K CCT, at 17W, with integral LED electronic driver. Fixture shall be provided with diffuse impact resistant polycarbonate lens. Final fixture color shall be selected by Architect. Fixture shall be Prescolite LBSLEDA10L-30K-8-XX or approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity

Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

9.

FIXTURE TYPE “E1”: Thermoplastic self-powered LED exit sign with integral LED emergency lighting heads and remote capacity for remote emergency lighting heads. Fixture shall have

5.

6. integral 6V-24W lead-calcium batteries and self-test feature. Fixture shall have (2) integral 6V-

4W LED-MR16 lamps. Fixture shall be universal mounting for wall or ceiling mount, and field selectable chevrons. Contractor shall refer to the contract drawings for the mounting requirements, number of faces and arrow requirements for each exit sign. Fixture shall be Emergi-

Lite Premier Series WW-PR-624M-4-R-2-LJ-AD or equivalent by Philips Lighting, Acuity

Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

FIXTURE TYPE “E2”: Wall/ceiling mounted self-powered emergency lighting fixture. Fixture shall have 6V-18W lead-calcium battery with (2) integral 6V, 4W LED remote emergency lighting fixture with (2) heads/lamps. Color to be selected by Architect. Fixture shall be Emergi-Lite

PR18M-2-LA or equivalent by Philips Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

FIXTURE TYPE “E3”: Indoor double remote head emergency lighting fixture. Fixture shall be

6V, 4W LED remote emergency lighting fixture with (2) heads/lamps. Color to be selected by

Architect. Fixture shall be Emergi-Lite EF10D-LA or equivalent by Philips Lighting, Acuity

Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 265100 – page 6 # 1397

7.

FIXTURE TYPE “E4”: Outdoor double remote head emergency lighting fixture. Fixture shall be

6V, 4W LED remote emergency lighting fixture with (2) heads/lamps. Color to be selected by

Architect. Fixture shall be Emergi-Lite EF39PD-LA or equivalent by Philips Lighting, Acuity

Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

10. FIXTURE TYPE “F1”: 7.5” diameter recessed LED adjustable downlight fixture. Fixture shall have LED light engine, delivering minimum 4400 lumens at 3000K, 85 CRI, at 78W, with integral

0-10V, 100%-1% 3-wire Hi-Lume Lutron dimming driver. Fixture shall have adjustable center beam optics that self-aligns with trim for optimal performance, allows for hot aiming by hand, tilts from 0-35 degrees in 1 degree increments and locks in place, rotates a full 365 degrees and locks in place, and accommodates slope ceilings up to 35 degrees. Fixture shall have custom flange neck to accommodate ceilings up to 2” thick, with clear semi-specular, low-iridescent aluminum reflector, painted white self-trim. Fixture shall be provided with mounting hardware for wood joists up to 24” on center. Fixture shall be UL listed. Fixture shall be Kirlin LRR-07420-120-29-

30K-MF-RH or approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

11. FIXTURE TYPE “G1”: LED track lighting fixture with full horizontal and vertical adjustment and yoke for fixing securely in place at the desired aiming location. Light engine shall deliver approximately 3000 lumens at a corrected color temperature of 3000K, 40 degree medium beam spread and machined aluminum housing with flared end and integral 0-10V (100%-10%) dimming driver. Contractor shall provide and install dual-circuit Bruck ECO track with all accessories as required for a complete installation; 96” lengths, quantity as shown on the drawings. Fixture and track color/finish to be selected by Architect. Fixture shall be Bruck Lighting Z45 series 350445-

XX-3-M-S2-ECOXX and track 380TEK-48-1-XX length as shown on drawings, or approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

12. FIXTURE TYPE “G2”: Same as fixture type “G1” except fixture shall have 20 degree spot beam spread. Fixture shall be Bruck Lighting Z45 series 350445-XX-3-S-S2-ECOXX and track

380TEK-48-1-XX length as shown on drawings, or approved equal by Philips Lighting, Acuity

Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

13. FIXTURE TYPE “G3”: Same as fixture type “G1” except fixture shall. Fixture shall have a light engine delivering approximately 1500 lumens at a corrected color temperature of 3000K, 40 degree medium beam spread. Fixture shall be Bruck Lighting Z25 series 350425-XX-3-M-S2-

ECOXX and track 380TEK-48-1-XX length as shown on drawings, or approved equal by Philips

Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

14. FIXTURE TYPE “H1”: Two-light bath wall vanity fixture. Fixture shall have two smooth cylindrical etched glass globes, each with (1) 13W screw-in type CFL lamps. Fixture shall be brushed nickel finish and be damp location listed. Fixture shall be Progress Lighting P2158-09, or

8. approved equal by Engineer.

FIXTURE TYPE “J1”: Pole mounted exterior LED site lighting fixture. Fixture shall be site lighting fixture shall provide minimum 5,800 lumens at 4000K, at 80W, and 120-277V LED drivers/light engines. Fixture shall have type III full cut-off distribution, die-cast aluminum housing with integral cooling fins, silicone gasket for sealing the housing against the lens surface,

UL listed for wet locations, rated for -40 degrees C starting, contains a 0-10V dimming interface for multi-level applications, IP66 rated, and poloyester powder-coat finish. Fixture and pole finish/color shall selected by Architect. Fixture shall have integral UL-listed surge-protector.

Fixture shall be provided with 20’-0” steel pole, 4” diameter with 7 gauge wall thickness (4 poles

9. total for project: 2 single fixture mount, 2 double fixture 180 degree mounts). Fixture shall be

RAB Lighting ALED3T78N with PS4-07-20D2 or approved equal by Hubbell Lighting, Philips

Lighting, Cooper Lighting, or Acuity Brands.

FIXTURE TYPE “K1”: LED vaportite wall mount fixture. Fixture shall be labeled for wet location, NEMA 4X rated have high impact, corrosion resistant, housing with globe guard and silicone gasketing. Fixture shall be Hubbell Outdoor VWGL-1 or approved equal.

15. FIXTURE TYPE “L1”: Exterior wall mount LED adjustable floodlighting fixture. Fixture shall

LED light engine with integral 120/277V driver with minimum 9,000 initial lumens at 80W.

LED’s shall have color temperature of 4000K. Fixture shall be constructed of die-cast aluminum housing with tempered glass lens. Fixture shall be installed with ½” threaded arm mount to ½” threaded exterior wall box cover plate. Contractor to verify existing wall box dimensions.

971

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

# 1397 Section 265100 – page 7

Fixture shall be UL listed for wet locations and be IP65 rated. Architect to select final fixture color/finish. Fixture shall be RAB Lighting FFLED80N/D10/PC or approved equal by Hubbell

Lighting, Philips Lighting, Cooper Lighting, or Acuity Brands.

10.

FIXTURE TYPE “M1”: Exterior wall mount LED lighting fixture. Fixture shall be constructed of die-cast aluminum housing with tempered glass lens. Fixture shall have overall maximum dimensions of 7”W x 9”H x 4”D. Fixture shall LED light engine with integral 120/277V driver with minimum 1300 initial lumens at 12W. LED’s shall have color temperature of 4000K.

Fixture shall be UL listed for wet locations and shall be IP65 rated. Architect to select final fixture color/finish. Fixture shall be RAB Lighting SLIM12N or approved equal by Hubbell

Lighting, Philips Lighting, Cooper Lighting, or Acuity Brands.

16. FIXTURE TYPE “N1”: 6” diameter recessed LED downlight fixture with UL8750 Class II LED light engine, 1400 lumens at 3000K, 80 CRI, 3 SCDM color consistency at maximum 24W.

Fixture shall have a one-piece 22 gauge non-corrosive steel platform, clear semi-specular, lowiridescent aluminum reflector, painted white self-trim, suitable for wet locations and shall be UL listed. Provide with mounting brackets ceiling joists for gypboard ceilings as required. Fixture shall be Precolite LC6LED-120-DM-6LCLED-6-30K-8-WH-WT-B6 or equivalent by Philips

Lighting, Acuity Brands, or Cooper Lighting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed, and substrate for supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES:

A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation," NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for review by Architect.

C. Install flush mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame and finished surface.

D. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.

E. Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that pendant fixtures are plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than 2 feet with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum one inch vertical adjustment. Mount continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than number of fixtures in the row.

F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

G. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet box fixtures stud.

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS

Section 265100 – page 8 # 1397

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Replace defective and burned out lamps for a period of one year following the Date of Substantial

Completion.

ATTIC STOCK 3.4

A. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to not less than 2 lamps, of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.

3.6

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for interior and exterior lighting fixtures as required. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

END OF SECTION

971

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

# 1397 Section 265100 – page 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS

AND EQUIPMENT

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 271500 – page 1

SECTION 271500 - STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary General

Conditions of Specifications, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements specified in all other sections of Division 26 & 28, but especially the following sections, apply to this Section.

1. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labeling and identification of computer cabling network and equipment.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The extent of the Building Cabling Network is shown on the drawings and is defined to include

(but not by way of limitation), furnishing and installing all equipment, materials, labor and services, related work, and performing all operations necessary to install, inspect, and test the

CCTV cabling system in all locations as shown on the drawings and as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Building Structured Cabling System shall include all conduit, raceways, innerducts, sleeves, patch panels, equipment racks, j-hooks, supports and backboards whether specifically indicated or not, but required for the complete continuous cabling system that is fully operational based on the Owner’s requirements.

Provide and install Category 6+, plenum rated, twisted pair cable, with both ends terminated, from patch panel management system in designated wiring closets to all data, telephone, video intercom station, and security camera locations.

Provide and install Category 6+ patch cords from the patch panels to the rack mounted

PoE switches. Provide one patch cord for each data jack and security camera.

PoE range extenders, as required on the drawings and specified below.

Provide and install computer cabling accessories and devices as herein specified and required for cabling continuity. These items include but not limited to cable terminations, connectors, couplers, hangers, brackets, mounting hardware and frame mountings, tie wraps, bushings, sleeves, fire-stop materials, tools and equipment necessary to complete the installation. System shall be grounded and all terminations shall be made per industry standards.

Refer to Summary of Work for protection of data cabling in conduits and raceways for exterior and interior applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A.

B.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for all cable, components and equipment prior to installation.

Materials List: Submit a complete materials list including part number and quantity for each component.

C. Installer Qualifications: Submit installer’s qualifications as required in 1.4 below.

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

AND EQUIPMENT

Section 271500 – page 2 # 1397

D. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for each product.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under use conditions.

F. Maintenance Data: Include data in Maintenance Manual specified in General and Supplementary

General Conditions of Specifications.

G. Reports: Submit cable and outlet test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 5 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates compliance of products with requirements of this section.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of computer network wiring and associated products, of types required and who have been installing same for satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Installer shall be BICSI certified – submit qualifications for review and approval.

C. Qualifications of Computer Network Cabling Detailer: The Cabling Detailer/Vendor must have a minimum of five years experience in the design and installation of the type of systems as described. The supplier/vendor must maintain a local service organization within a fifty (50) miles radius of the installation and shall maintain spare service replacement parts and accessories to insure minimal down time in the event of an equipment failure.

D. Codes and Standards

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC articles as applicable to installation, and construction of computer networks. a. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation, and color-coding of both power type wires/cables, and b. control/signal transmission media.

UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards 83,

486A and 910. Provide transmission media products which are UL-listed and labeled. c. d. e. f.

ASTM Compliance: comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8,

33, D-2219, and D-2220. provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20-deg C (68-deg F).

IEEE Compliance: Comply with standard for Gigabit Ethernet.

FCC Compliance: Comply with U.S. Federal Communications Commission

Class B standard for allowable radiation from network equipment and wiring.

FDDI Compliance: Comply with Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) standards. g. h.

Manufacturer's Requirements: Comply with the requirements of Owner's

Computer Vendor networking design and connections.

BICSI & EIA/TIA standards.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS

AND EQUIPMENT

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 271500 – page 3

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

B. Store materials in original packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping.

C.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Continuously coordinate work schedules and other details with other trades and Owner’s representative.

1.7

2.1

WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Computer Network Cabling and associated equipment and design to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects and to operate to design specifications for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of installation and acceptance by the owner. All cables and connectors shall be by a single vendor or vendor’s with an agreement to obtain the required warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Source Limitations: Obtain all products except twisted-pair and optical fiber cables through one source from a single manufacturer.

Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

1.

2.

Cable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

AMP Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.

Belden Inc.; Electronics Division.

Berk-Tec

Brand-Rex Co.; Unit of BICC Cables Corp.

General Cable Corporation.

Lucent Technologies; Global Service Provider.

Superior Essex (Basis of Design)

Terminal and Connector Components: a. b. c.

Leviton (Basis of Design & Owner Standard)

Ortronics

Molex

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

AND EQUIPMENT

Section 271500 – page 4 # 1397

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system.

Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance.

B. All cable installed in supply and return air plenum must be UL listed and approved for installation in supply and return air plenum.

2.3

C. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate 20 percent future increase in active workstations.

MOUNTING ELEMENTS

A. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical

Systems”.

2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLES, CONNECTORS, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT

A.

B.

Cables and Terminations: Listed as complying with Category 6+ of TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

Conductors: Solid copper.

C. Data Cabling: Category 6+ plenum rated cabling DataGain 66-246-2B by Superior Essex or approved equal, with blue jacket color. Final color selection by Owner.

D. Telephone Cabling: Category 6+ plenum rated cabling DataGain 66-246-4B by Superior Essex or approved equal, with white jacket color. Final color selection by Owner.

E. Intercomm and Security Camera Cabling: Category 6+ plenum rated cabling DataGain 66-246-5B by Superior Essex or approved equal, with green jacket color. Final color selection by Owner.

F. UTP Cable: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Four, thermoplastic-insulated, individually twisted pairs of conductors; No. 24 AWG, color-coded; enclosed in plenum rated jacket.

G. UTP and STP Plenum Cable: Listed for use in air-handling spaces. Features are as specified for cables, conductors, UTP cable, and STP workstation cable except materials are modified as required for listing.

H. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools.

I.

1. IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project. 2.

Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS

AND EQUIPMENT

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 271500 – page 5

1.

2.

3.

4.

Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.

Mounting: Rack.

Ratings: Category 6.

5.

Leviton 24 Port, 110/6Port Panel, CAT6 HD, T568A/B, 8POS, 1.75x19, vendor# 69586-

U24.

Leviton 48 Port, 110/6Port Panel, CAT6 HD, T568A/B, 8POS, 1.75x19, vendor# 69586-

U48.

J. Surge Protection: Rack mounted surge protection device for PoE+ and non-PoE devices.

1. Provides 16 channels of surge protection.

2. Works with PoE+ and non-PoE 10/100/1000 equipment.

3. Gigabit PoE+ power

4. Rack mountable in 19” racks, size 2 RU.

5. Connection Method: Standard RJ45 (16 In – 16 Out)

6. Transient Response Time: 1 picosecond typ.

7. Clamping Voltage 58V (on all lines)

8. Equal to Nitek model #IPPWR16. Provide (1) per IDF and MDF rack. Provide and install a total (4) on project. Patch exterior cameras only through surge protection device.

K. UTP Patch Cords: Four-pair cables in 48-inch lengths, terminated with RJ-45 plug at each end.

Use keyed plugs for data service. Provide patch cords for each data/telephone/security/intercom location shown on the contract drawings. Patch cable color shall match cable color to device.

L. Workstation Outlets: Jack assemblies mounted in single or multigang faceplate as shown on the drawings.

1. Faceplate: Thermoplastic with ID Window by Leviton. a. Single-Gang

1-port, vendor # 42080-1WS

2-port, vendor # 42080-2WS

3-port, vendor # 42080-3WS

4-port, vendor # 42080-4WS

6-port, vendor # 42080-6WS

M. POE Extenders:

1. Veracity Outreach Max #VOR-ORM (PoE) or approved equal by the Engineer. a. b. c. d. e. f.

The OUTREACH MAX shall provide the capability to extend the maximum

Ethernet cable length by up to an additional 100m.

The OUTREACH MAX shall be fitted in line with the cable and act as a repeater allowing network cables to be joined together.

The OUTREACH MAX shall provide the capability to provide 60W high-power

Power over Ethernet (POE) to remote devices, and shall be PoE and PoE_ compliant (IEEE 802.3af & 802.3at).

The OUTREACH MAX shall draw its power from the network cable using PoE

(Power over Ethernet).

The OUTREACH MAX shall be fully transparent with no restriction on network traffic.

It shall be possible to connect multiple OUTREACH and cable combinations in a daisy chain to form an extension of up to 1000m.

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

AND EQUIPMENT

Section 271500 – page 6 # 1397

2.5 CONNECTIONS

3.2

A. Ground equipment.

1.

2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A.

Install ground terminal at service location and connect according to Division 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torquetightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.

Examine areas and conditions under which the computer network cabling system is to be installed, and notify Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Owner and Installer.

INSTALLATION OF COMPUTER BUILDING CABLING SYSTEM:

A.

Install system and components in accordance National Electrical Code, manufacturer’s written instructions, with recognized industry practices, and ensure that system complies with requirements and serves intended purpose.

B. Ground all provided equipment.

C. Wiring Methods: Install the entire network wiring system in cable tray, j-hooks and sleeves.

D. Provide all additional sleeves, conduits and innerducts etc. which are required but not shown on the electrical drawings.

E. Provide bushings on the cut end of all conduits to prevent cable damage.

F. Cables in conduits shall be securely held in place by an industry acceptable practice and installed with sufficient bending radius so as not to kink, shear or damage electrical conductors or optical fibers. Pulling tension shall be monitored with a dynamometer (tension gauge) to ensure that recommended tensile ratings are not exceeded.

3.3 LABELING

A. All network cables and patch cables shall be labeled at both ends with camera number and location.

B.

C.

All patch panels jacks shall be labeled with associated camera number.

Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS

AND EQUIPMENT

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 271500 – page 7

3.4 TESTING

A. Certification: Test all network outlets and equipment to the maximum specified performance capability. Provide a report listing each network and telephone outlet location and certify its satisfactory performance in compliance with the specifications.

B. All UTP cabling will be certified to meet and or exceed the Category 6 specifications as set forth in TIA/EIA-568-C.2-1 using field testers. Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable installed:

C.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Wire map (pin to pin connectivity)

Length (in feet)

Attenuation

Near End Crosstalk (NEXT)

Far End Crosstalk (FEXT)

ELFEXT

Attenuation/Crosstalk Ratio (ACR)

Return Loss

9.

10.

Propogation Delay

Delay Skew

All fiber optic cabling shall be tested based on a source/meter setup to report the loss through each fiber strand. Tests shall comply with TIA FOTP-95. Submit written test results to the engineer for review & approval.

D. Test equipment shall provide an electronic and printed record of these tests.

E. Owner reserves the right to hire an independent testing company to spot check the test results. If the results vary more than 10% from the results provided by the Contractor, the Contractor will be required to prove his results are correct or retest the entire system.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Cable Identification: Identify each cable and termination at both ends with the Owner’s room number and the wiring cabinet or device to which connected. Bind all information in a three ring binder. Deliver cable book to owner and obtain receipt.

END OF SECTION 271500

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 281300 – page 1

SECTION 281300 – SECURITY CAMERAS AND VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEMS

1.2

1.3

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Related Documents

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The installation of new networked IP-based video intercom systems, including video door stations and master intercom stations. Intercom systems shall control door release via contact ouputs and door hardware controllers.

2. Intercom Video Door Systems. a. Networked, IP-based PoE video intercom door stations with networked, PoE video master stations. Video master stations shall have ability to release doors via door hardware controller and power supply.

C. The installation of new networked IP Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) digital security cameras, camera mounts, cabling, and programming. All camera cabling shall be routed back to patch panels in

Computer Room IDF Rack on the main level.

D. The system cabling, located in interior areas, between field devices and the network IDF closet shall consist of plenum rated cable for locations above suspended ceilings, in existing walls, or run in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) conduit (in non public areas) or Wire Mold (in public areas) when exposed.

Public areas include: Corridors, Classrooms, Library, offices, etc and Non-Public areas include: storage, electrical rooms, boiler rooms, janitor closets, etc.

1. For new construction, all devices, backboxes, wiring and conduit shall be completely concealed.

RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A.

SUBMITTALS

A.

120 VAC power for video systems head end exists or will be provided as part of this contract.

The Installation Contractor shall submit acceptable equipment for review by the Engineer and the

Architect. The Installation Contractor shall bear all liability and penalties for damages arising

SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 281300 – page 2 # 1397 from his failure to submit equipment that meets these Specifications, including, but not limited to, any liabilities and penalties for failure to meet construction deadlines.

B. Final determination of compliance with this Specifications shall be with the Engineer and the

Architect, which, at its discretion, may require proof of performance at the cost of the Installation

Contractor.

C. At the start of work, the Installation Contractor shall submit the following material for review by the Engineer and the Architect:

1. Shop drawings as follows (The Installation Contractor is responsible for coordinating size and scale of all drawings with the Engineer and the Architect): a. b.

Plan view drawings showing all equipment locations and conduit/cable runs.

Typical field equipment mounting detail drawings for passive infrared motion detectors-where applicable, access control card readers, magnetic door contacts, request to exit/emergency exit devices, video cameras, video camera housings and mountings, power supplies, and UPS equipment, where applicable. c. Single line riser diagram showing all equipment, all connections and number and size of all conductors. d. Drawings for the school showing the layout configuration and location of all

Installation Contractor installed equipment related to this project. e. Termination drawings of field equipment, including passive infrared motion detectors where applicable, access control card readers, magnetic door contacts, electromagnetic locks, request to exit devices, video intercom stations, power supplies, and mounts. f. Catalog data sheets of: the security management system mini head end and field panels (include specific modules in the field panel or ancillary to the field panels); passive infrared motion detectors; power supplies; video intercom stations, access control card readers; magnetic door contacts; power supply and ancillary equipment; request to exit devices, lightning/surge protector modules for signal and power; and wire/cable. g. Since Shop drawings and Record Set drawings are taken from the Contract

Drawings they require some title modifications as follows: remove the Schiller and Hersh title block and replace it with “Original drawings by the Schiller and

Hersh Associates, Inc. – these drawings have been modified by (insert the name of the Security Installation Contractor) to show record set conditions,”

1.4

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 281300 – page 3 and all drawings should be stamped “RECORD SET DRAWING” and the letters in the words should be one-half to one inch high.

2.

3.

The Installation Contractor shall meet ICO/ANSI A117.1-2003

ADA requirements. Shop drawings shall reflect ICO/ANSI A117.1-

2003 ADA requirements regarding height, type of function, accessibility, and other applicable ICO/ANSI A117.1-1228 ADA guidelines. As part of the Closure documents the Installation

Contractor shall provide a statement that it has complied with

ICO/ANSI A117.1 requirements.

Ampere loads for the security management system; the intrusion system, passive infrared motion detectors where applicable (battery Ampere-Hour capacity).

4. A schedule identifying the types and quantities of the security management system panels, each input terminal and connected passive infrared motion detector (where applicable), magnetic door contact, access control card reader, and request to exit/emergency exit device, and the identification of each output terminal and connected output device.

D.

5. Samples of various items when so requested.

Provide Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) procedures, testing criteria, and examples of testing methodology and check-off sheets for review and approval at least two (2) weeks prior to initiation of system installation.

E. Provide Site Acceptance Test (SAT) procedures, testing criteria, and examples of testing methodology and check-off sheets for review and approval at least two (2) weeks prior to completion of system installation.

APPLICABLE LISTINGS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A.

B.

All equipment shall be U.L. listed or meet U.L. requirements for its intended use.

1.

2.

3.

U.L. 294 Access Control System Units

U.L. 639 Intrusion Detection Units

U.L. 796 Printed Wiring Boards

Electronic Industries Association (EIA)

1. EIA 170 Electrical Performance Standards - Monochrome Television Studio Facilities.

SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

Section 281300 – page 4

2.

NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

# 1397

EIA 232D Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit - Terminating

C.

3.

Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Exchange.

EIA 330 Electrical Performance Standards for CCTV Camera 525/60 Interlaced 2:1

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

1.

2.

IEEE Std C62.41 Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits.

IEEE Std 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial

Power Systems.

IEEE Std 299 Recommended Practice for Measurement of Shielding Power Circuits.

D.

3.

National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA)

1.

2.

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000VMaximum).

NEMA ICS-1 Industrial Controls and Systems

E. All raceways and wiring shall be installed in compliance with NFPA Standard 70 (National

Electrical Code - 2011). All applicable portions of the National Electrical Code shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panel boards and similar appurtenances.

F. The system equipment and its installation shall comply with all other local codes and Authorities having Jurisdiction (AHJ’s).

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

2.1

A.

B. Equipment for security management system, video system, and intercom subsystem shall be as shown on the drawings and as herein described in this Section. The drawings shall illustrate the quantities and locations of devices to be provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SECURITY CAMERA PRODUCTS

A.

It is the intent of these specifications to provide for a security management system and intercom subsystem that comply in all respects with the requirements of all applicable codes and standards and performance objectives. Equipment, material, installation practices, etc. that do not meet these requirements or do not meet the performance standards herein specified shall not be acceptable.

System Components and Capabilities

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 281300 – page 5

1. Manufacturers:

B. a. AXIS Communications (Basis of Design) b. Samsung c. Panasonic

Indoor Camera

1. Provide indoor color, IP network, fixed cameras equal to AXIS #P3354, or approved equal by the Engineer.

2.

3.

Recommended setting, coordinate in field with Owner after viewing on screen: 15 fps with a 1280 x 720 resolution and H.264 with VBR.

The network camera shall feature up to 1.3 Mega Pixel HD (720p) resolution in a 16:9 format. 4:3 format shall also be available in smaller resolutions.

4.

5.

6.

7.

The camera should be capable of capturing and transmitting an image size of up to 1280 x 960 resolution at 30 images per second.

The camera shall feature Wide Dynamic Range. The WDR function shall feature an adaptive motion system to eliminate motion blur.

The camera shall feature an automatic back light compensation technology that detects and enhances dark areas in the field of view and increases the gain in those areas.

The camera shall feature built in license free video analytics functions including line crossing, appear/disappear, audio detection, camera tamper (scene change) and enter/exit a

8.

9. predefined zone.

The camera shall feature advanced motion detection with definable detection areas, minimum / maximum object size definition and a learning algorithm that ignores false alarms such as trees and waves on water.

The camera shall feature a smart codec that can use a higher quality compression for regions of interest in the image, thereby prioritizing the encoding of the most important areas of the field of view. These regions of interest can be manually defined or automatically selected using the face detection technology built into the camera.

10. The network camera shall provide video transmission in an open format with H.264 or

MJPEG compression.

11. The camera shall be capable of simultaneously transmitting multiple video streams of different resolution, compression, frame-rate and compression settings.

12.

13.

The network camera should be configurable through a built in web server that can be accessed via standard browsers including Internet Explorer, Firefox, Chrome & Safari.

The camera shall have high sensitivity with Simple Day/Night function: 0.3 lx (color),

14.

15.

0.2 lx (B/W) at F1.3 (Wide).

The camera shall have a 3-year warranty that includes parts and labor.

The camera shall be I.P. type with Ethernet RJ-45 (10/100Base-T) connection and have H.264(MPEG-4 part 10/AVC), MJPEG, video compression formats.

16. The camera shall utilize Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) technology, 12V DC, PoE

(IEEE802.3af), max 6W.

D. Outdoor Fixed Dome Cameras:

1. Provide vandal-resistant, indoor/outdoor, weatherproof, color, IP network, fixed cameras equal to

AXIS P-3214-VE, or approved equal by the Engineer.

2. Recommended setting, coordinate in field with Owner after viewing on screen: 15 fps with a

1280 x 720 resolution and H.264 with VBR.

SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 281300 – page 6 # 1397

3. The network camera shall feature up to 1.3 Mega Pixel HD (780p) resolution in a 16:9 format.

4:3 format shall also be available in smaller resolutions.

4. The camera shall have three (3) alarm inputs. The alarm inputs shall be able to trigger such actions as recording, email notification, indication on browser, and Panasonic protocol output.

5. The camera shall feature Super Dynamic Range with and Adaptive Black Stretch technologies.

6. The camera shall feature advanced motion detection with definable detection areas, minimum / maximum object size definition and a learning algorithm that ignores false alarms such as trees and waves on water.

7. The network camera shall provide video transmission in an open format with H.264 or MJPEG compression.

8. The camera shall be capable of simultaneously transmitting multiple video streams of different resolution, compression, frame-rate and compression settings.

9. The camera shall have high sensitivity with Simple Day/Night function: 0.3 lx (color), 0.06 lx

(B/W) at F1.3 (Wide).

10. The camera shall have built-in dehumidification device.

11. Camera shall be IP66 rated, and vandal resistant IK10 rated.

12. The camera shall have a minimum 2-year warranty that includes parts and labor.

13. The camera shall be I.P. type with Ethernet RJ-45 (10/100Base-T) connection and have

H.264(MPEG-4 part 10/AVC), MJPEG, video compression formats.

14. The camera shall be fully supported and tested by exacqVision Video Management System software.

15. The camera shall utilize Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) technology, 12W with PoE (IEEE802.3af).

2.2 VIDEO INTERCOM PRODUCTS

A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION a. IP Network Compatible Video Intercom System: A network-based communication and security system featuring video entry security, internal communication, emergency stations, and paging.

All units and app in the systems shall be able to unlock doors remotely on a network, assist onsite visitors from an offsite location, broadcast emergency announcements, and communicate using a

PoE network.

1. Power Source: Power over Ethernet (802.3af).

2. Network Interface: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX Ethernet (RJ-45).

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Network Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP, UDP, SIP, HTTP, HTTPS , MJPEG , RTSP,

RTP, RTCP, IGMP, MLD, SMTP, DHCP, NTP, DNS.

Bandwidth Usage: G.711: 64Kbps x 2 per video call. a. 64Kbps per monitor. b. H.264: 24Kbps ~ 2,048Kbps.

Communication: Hands-free (VOX), push-to-talk (simplex), or handset (full-duplex).

Video Display: 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) color LCD.

Camera: Type: i. 1/4 inch (6 mm) color CMOS. ii. View Area: 2 feet 2 inches (660 mm) vertical x 3 feet 1 inch (940 mm) horizontal at 20 inches (508 mm).

Video Stream: ONVIF Profile S.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 281300 – page 7

9. Door Release: Programmable Form C dry contact, 24V AC/ DC, 500mA – use EL-12S

(use RY-24L for larger contact rating, which requires 24V DC power supply) or use

RY-IP44 with 4 multipurpose relays.

10. Wire Type: CAT-6.

11. Distance: iii. Door Station or RA Station to Network Node: 330 feet (100 meters). iv. Master Station to Network Node: 330 feet (100 meters).

B. MANUFACTURERS

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Aiphone Corp.

2. Approved equal by Engineer.

C. FUNCTIONAL COMPONENTS a. As indicated on the drawings or as required to complete system.

1. Video Master Station Model IX-MV: a. An IP addressable video master station with a 3.5 inch es (89 mm) color LCD monitor. It can be wall or desk mounted (desk stand included). The IX-MV offers handset (duplex) and hands-free (VOX/PTT) communication and call up to 500 other

IX units. It connects directly to a network using CAT-5e/6 cable. This station requires a 802.3af compliant Power-over-Ethernet network.

2. b. Provide Quantity of two (2) for project.

Audio/Video Door Station Model IX-DF: a. Flush mount unit connects to a PoE network using CAT-5e/6 cable. The IX-DF will call up to 20 IX-MV masters or instances of the IX MOBILE. The door station features a stainless steel face plate, a form C contact for door release, a 600 ohm

3.

4. b. output for paging or an amplified speaker, call placed/answered indication, and a contact input.

Provide Quantity of one (1) for project at the new Lobby Entrance.

Stainless Steel Enclosure Model SBX-ISDVF: a. 18-Guage stainless steel enclosure designed for surface mounting the IX-DF b. door stations.

Provide Quantity of (1) for project.

Audio/Video Door Station Model IX-DA: a. Surface mount unit connects to a PoE network using CAT-5e/6 cable. The IX-

DF will call up to 20 IX-MV masters or instances of the IX MOBILE. The door station features a stainless steel face plate, a form C contact for door release, a 600 b. ohm output for paging or an amplified speaker, call placed/answered indication, and a contact input.

Provide Quantity of one (1) for project at Cokesbury Lobby Entrance.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring diagrams. The Installation Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for installation of the systems and equipment. The Installation Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, clamps, connectors, and wiring and route such wiring through the conduit for all systems and equipment.

SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 281300 – page 8

B.

# 1397

All penetrations of floor slabs, roofs, and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local codes.

C. End of Line Devices (i.e., resistors, diodes, capacitors) shall be furnished as required and shall be installed at the field device.

D. All equipment shall be installed in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings, and in accordance with manufacturer's data and this Specification.

E. During the erection of ladders scaffolding and any elevating mechanism the Installation

Contractor will exercise extreme care to avoid damage to any finishes. Any damage created by the Installation Contractor shall be repaired to original condition.

F. All equipment shall be installed using mechanical fasteners. Mounting with tape will not be acceptable.

3.4 SECURITY SYSTEM WIRING

A. Provide and install, in accordance with all applicable National, State, and local codes, the manufacturer's recommendations, and the Contract Drawings and Specifications, all equipment, wiring in conduit and outlet boxes required for erection of a complete and properly operating system. As applicable, plenum rated cable may be routed exposed above fully accessible suspended ceilings.

1. All plenum rated cable shall be suspended from the structure by approved means (i.e.,

D-rings). Placing plenum rated cable directly on any suspended ceiling grid or hung from other equipment or conduit shall not be permitted.

2.

3.

Connectors and couplings for all conduits shall be compression type fittings only.

Greenfield or flexible metal conduit shall only be used between a junction box and a field device located in a concealed area. Greenfield or flexible metal conduit may also be used between a junction box and the head end equipment rack; it shall be restricted to a maximum length of five (5) feet.

B. All cable shall be plenum rated; wire shall be color coded; and wire size, type and manufacturer shall be as cited on the Contract Drawings. All cable run in conduit: shall be color coded; and wire size, type and manufacturer shall be as cited on the Contract Drawings. Wire size and types specified are minimum and shall be increased, as required, to meet proper system operating parameters and field conditions.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 281300 – page 9

1. Installation Contractor shall verify before starting a cable pull, that conduit ends are checked to ensure that bushings are in place and that no burrs or irregularities are present which might damage cables.

2. Cables and wires such as signal leads, having small conductors and low strength are particularly vulnerable to damage or breakage due to excessive tension - extreme care shall be used in installing them. The manufacturer's maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded.

3. Cable ends extending from conduits after pulling shall be protected against mechanical damage during the interval prior to final termination, testing, and connection to equipment.

C. Terminations

1. Termination of power cables within enclosures shall include clamping fittings to provide support where required.

2. Signal cables terminated on blocks at consoles, panels and racks, and at equipment terminal boards shall be arranged with individual wires of sufficient length to permit neat forming and training from the end of the cable jacket to terminal points, allowing sufficient room for sleeves with their respective cable numbers. Nonmetallic ties and supports shall be used, as required, to provide a neat and orderly installation of good appearance.

3. Not more than two wires shall be connected to a single terminal, and where two wires are connected, the two lugs shall be placed back-to-back on the terminal stud or screw with a bare or tinned copper washer between the two to ensure proper contact, or special lugs designed for proper contact shall be used.

4. Signal cables entering panels and racks for termination shall be neatly trained and formed. Bundles shall be supported by non metallic ties from point of entry to terminating point.

D. Identification of Cables and Wires

1. All cables shall have permanent identification markers applied to each cable at the terminal ends. Permanent markers shall have a white surface with cable identification in black, and lettering shall be a minimum 1/8 inch high. The alphanumeric conductor identifications used, shall be the wire numbers shown on the Installation Contractor’s prepared wiring diagrams.

SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 281300 – page 10

3.5

# 1397

CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Installation Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the work, after approval by the Engineer and the Architect. If the Installation

Contractor, as part of the work, is responsible for placing sleeves and/or hangers and they are not placed in time or are improperly placed, the Installation Contractor shall be responsible at its expense for all resulting forming, drilling and corrective work to be done to the work and to other work, including patching.

B. All cutting, fitting, patching and drilling by the Installation Contractor shall be done promptly and so as to leave the work in condition and appearance acceptable to the Engineer and the

Architect.

C. Structural members shall not be cut except by written authorization given by the Engineer and pursuant to the direction given by the Architect.

3.6 CLEAN UP

A. During and upon completion of the installation, all debris created by the Installation Contractor's installation shall be removed by the Installation Contractor from the premises of the site/facilities or disposed of as directed.

3.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION

. The system shall be tested for final acceptance in the presence of the Engineer and Architect,

Installation Contractor's representative and the security management system manufacturer's representative.

D. The following shall be tested during the Site Acceptance Testing (SAT):

1. Every card reader access control portal for proper ingress, egress, and alarm output operation.

E.

2. The security management system field panel for proper input/output operations and communications to the head end computer system.

Upon successful completion of all final SATs, and before formal System Acceptance the

Installation Contractor's, security management system and video system manufacturer's representatives shall each author and sign a letter confirming the successful completion of the testing. Two (2) copies of each letter shall be forwarded to the Engineer and the Architect.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS SECURITY CAMERAS AND

VIDEO INTERCOMM SYSTEMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 281300 – page 11

F. All final SAT testing shall be conducted at a time convenient to the Engineer and the Architect, and all testing costs shall be borne by the Installation Contractor as part of this Contract.

3.8 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS

A. The Installation Contractor shall refer to Specification 017823-1.4.B.1 for further requirements.

At a minimum, include:

1. Manufacturer's catalog pages of all installed equipment and components, all Installation

Contractor installed as-built conduits, equipment internal termination drawings, and wiring diagrams for all equipment and systems.

2.

3.

Detailed index for reference.

Each set shall be bound within a common loose-leaf, hard back binder indexed, numbered and organized with table of contents for convenient reference.

5. Instructions shall be complete including step-by-step instructions for start-up, operation, shut down, testing, and maintenance/ troubleshooting.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system.

3.9

B. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site training for the specific system installed. Assume a minimum of (6) of the Owner’s personnel will be trained.

WARRANTY

A. The equipment manufacturer shall directly guarantee the new system equipment for a period of two (2) years from the date of official acceptance of the system.

B. The Installation Contractor shall perform maintenance as needed on all equipment throughout a two (2) year warranty period. All such maintenance shall be performed at the Installation

Contractor’s sole cost and expense, including parts and labor. This shall include having the service period available on a call basis with a response within four (4) hours and repair time within two (2) hours.

END OF SECTION 281300

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 283111 – page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

1.2

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division - 01 Specification Section, apply to work of this Section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. This Section covers fire alarm systems, including initiating devices, notification appliances, controls, and supervisory devices.

B.

C.

D.

Work covered by this section includes the furnishing of labor, equipment, and materials for expansion of the existing EST fire alarm system for the new addition and renovated areas, as indicated on the drawings. Owner’s fire alarm vendor is Wayman Fire Protection, Inc. of

Wilmington DE, at (302) 994-5757.

The Fire Detection and Alarm System shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software programming to perform the following functions:

1. Installation of new auxiliary NAC panel, as required, for new notification devices and circuits.

2. Control and monitoring of elevators, door hold-open devices, fire suppression systems, emergency power systems, and other equipment as indicated in the drawings and specifications.

3. Provide new notification and initiation devices and wiring for the renovated areas of the building.

4. Re-testing of the entire building fire alarm system, (both existing and new devices) to comply with NFPA 72. Local fire marshal shall witness all testing of the new and existing fire alarm equipment.

The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, NFPA 90A,

Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760.

Additionally, the entire installed system and all integrated system operations shall be within the guidelines of the 2012 IBC Code Series, and CABO/ANSI A117.1-2003, including all the latest revisions.

E. Provide system suitable for type occupancy as defined by local Building Code and as approved by local Fire Marshal. Prior to commencing the construction work, contact the local Fire Marshal, and obtain all the necessary approvals.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "U.L." label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit.

Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable.

B. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a manufacturer who has been engaged in production of this type (software driven) of equipment for at least ten (10) years, and has a fully-equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the installation.

C. The system controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 283111 – page 2 # 1397 be marked in accordance with NEC article 760-23.

D. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with fire alarm systems work similar to that required for this project. At least one NICET Level 2 technician shall be on site at all times during the fire alarm installation. The installer shall have a NICET Level 3 technician visit the site at least one time per week during the fire alarm installation to review and approve the installation.

1.

2.

3.

Firm with manufacturer’s factory trained personnel.

Firm with factory authorized service organization and spare parts stock.

All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with UL 864 requirements. In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirement mentioned above, the system controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760-23.

E. Codes and Standards:

1.

2.

NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC standards pertaining to fire alarm systems.

UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to fire

3. alarm systems; and provide products and components, which are UL-listed and labeled.

FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm systems and accessories, which are FM-approved.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation instructions, for each type of fire alarm system equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings with floor plans to shown to scale, showing equipment/device locations and connecting wiring of entire fire alarm system. Include wiring and riser diagrams, the candela values for all strobes and full battery calculations for the system. The shop drawings for the fire alarm system shall be performed and signed by a NICET Level 3 person or licensed professional engineer in state where equipment is to be installed.

1.5

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of fire alarm equipment installed, including furnished specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle fire alarm equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new.

B. Store fire alarm equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm systems manufactured by:

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 283111 – page 3

1. Edwards (EST) – Existing fire alarm panel.

2.2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS:

A. GENERAL

1. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component. The catalog numbers specified under this section are those of Edwards (EST) and constitute the type product quality, material, and desired operating features.

B. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, all hard-wired initiation and control circuits shall be individually configurable, on-site, in any combination, to provide either initiating circuit, notification circuit, or auxiliary control circuit operation.

C. Equipment submissions must include a minimum of the following:

1.

2.

3.

Complete descriptive data indicating UL listing for all system components.

Complete sequence of operations of the system.

Complete system wiring diagrams for components capable of being connected to the system and interfaces to equipment supplied by others.

A copy of any state and/or local Fire Alarm System equipment approvals. 4.

2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A. Existing fire alarm control panel is EST Model 3X series, microprocessor based, addressable, digital fire alarm and Integrated life safety systems control panel.

2.4

B.

FIRE ALARM DEVICES

A. Addressable Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations, SIGA-278

1. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings EST Model SIGA-278 Signature series addressable double action manual pull stations.

2. System address shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Mounting shall be as directed.

4. Enclose pull station in protective lexan shield for all locations. No audible alarm is required, similar to STI model #STI1200.

5. Manual pull stations shall be located so that, from any part of the building, a distance no greater than 200 ft need be traveled to reach the pull station.

6. The manual pull stations shall be keyed to match the main fire alarm control panel. No allen wrench type pull stations will be allowed.

B. ADA Synchronized Horn/ Strobes, Genesis Series

1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans EST Genesis synchronized Integrity series

ADA/UL1971 approved combination horn/strobe. Units shall meet UL 1971 and A.D.A. equivalency compliance standards.

2. Mounting shall be as shown and semi-flush where possible in new structure and/or as directed.

Were surface mounting is required, surface boxes shall be utilized.

3. Horn Strobes units shall be sized as indicated on the plans. Each strobe shall be rated at either 15 cd for the high bay area or 110 cd for the low bay area. The office area devices shall be 15/75 cd,

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 283111 – page 4 # 1397 or as noted.

C. ADA Synchronized Strobe Flashing Lights, Genesis Series

1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans EST Genesis synchronized ADA/LJLI971 strobe flashing lights. Units shall have a 15 candela minimum- flash intensity output at ten feet. Units shall meet UL 1971 and A.D.A. equivalency compliance standards.

2. Mounting shall be as shown and semi-flush where possible in the new structure unless otherwise directed. Where surface mounting is required, type 27193-11 surface boxes shall be utilized.

D. Addressable Heat Detectors, SIGA-HFS

1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans EST Model SIGA-HFS heat detectors with a 135'F fixed temperature heat range as indicated on the drawings.

2. System address shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Units shall be addressable and mounting shall be semi-flush on type SIGA-SB detector bases. All sensing devices in common areas shall be fitted with a SIGA-TS trim skirt.

4. Where elevator recall is required, furnish EST # 283-PL heat detectors where shown. These units shall be connected to an EST # SIGA-CT-1 addressable module for connection to shunt trip controls.

E.Addressable Smoke Detectors, SIGA-PHS

1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans EST Model SIGA-PHS smoke detectors.

2. System address shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Units shall be addressable and mounting shall be semi-flush on type SIGA-SB detector bases. All sensing devices in common areas shall be fitted with a SIGA-TS trim skirt.

F. Addressable Air Duct Smoke Detectors, SIGA-DH

1. Furnish and install at each air handling unit and where shown on the drawings EST Model SIGA-

DH addressable duct detector housing assembly.

2. Provide Model SIGA-PS Signature series addressable photoelectric smoke detector, SIGA-RB relay detector base, and proper length 6261 series sampling tubes as part of the assembly.

3. System address shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

4. A model SIGA-LED remote duct detector alarm indicating LED station shall be provided as shown for local indication of remotely mounted duct detector alarm. A mounting template shall also be included to facilitate mounting of detector and cutout of ducts.

5. For any smoke detectors required to be located outside the building (i.e. on the roof) or in an attic, provide a low temperature rated smoke detector with a corresponding monitoring module, if required.

6. Each duct smoke detector shall be capable of being tested from the control panel.

7. For each duct detector, provide a remote test station (RTS), keyed to match the fire alarm panel and with LED indicators.

G. Addressable Single Point Monitor Modules, SIGA-CT 1 / SIGA-MCT1

1. Furnish and install EST Model SIGA-CT 1 single point input monitor module for use with N/0 contact devices such as sprinkler water flow, supervisory tamper switches, power riser supervisory relays, and other miscellaneous supervisory devices.

2. System addresses shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Units shall be semi-flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 283111 – page 5

H. Addressable Dual Point Monitor Modules, SIGA-CT2 / SIGA-MCT2

1. Furnish and install EST Model SIGA-CT2 dual point input monitor module for use with N/O contact devices such as sprinkler water flow and supervisory tamper switches in the same location

I. and misc. monitor points.

2. System addresses shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Units shall be semi-flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

Addressable Signal Circuit Module, SIGA-CCI / SIGA-MCCI

1. The signal circuit modules shall be supplied and capable of controlling audible and visual signal circuits. Module shall provide supervision for shorts and open faults of circuit wiring. Modules shall be placement supervised.

2. System addresses shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Provide proper number of modules as required with no more than 15 strobe lights on any given circuit.

J. Addressable Relay Modules, SIGA-CR

1. The addressable auxiliary relay modules shall be supplied to provide field terminations of circuit and supported by the addressable loops.

2. System addresses shall be retained in device PROM and shall not require the use of any dials, switches, or jumpers to set addresses.

3. Each relay shall have one (1) SPDT contact rated at I ampere resistive load at 30 VDC. EST addressable auxiliary relays shall be utilized in conjunction with EST # PAM-1 for load bearing contacts to be provided for the following functions: a. Elevator recall b. Air handling unit shutdown c. Fire door release d. Time control of integrated systems e. Miscellaneous control ( Shunt trip) f. Smoke control systems.

K. Booster Panels:

1. Furnish and install as required EST # BPS-6, power booster panels. These devices shall power and supervise the connected strobe lights. Circuiting shall be as shown on the plans with no exceptions allowed since these locations have been chosen to accommodate the requirements of ADA.

Booster panels shall be connected to the addressable loop and programmed in a general alarm format

2.5 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM FEATURES

A. Control of auxiliary services:

1. Fan shut down relays. Provide controls for the Air Handling Units control circuits to shut-down the respective units when any of the associated duct detector are activated. Provide necessary relays as part of the duct detector housing.

2. Elevators: a. Recall. b. Alternate recall. c. Flashing hat control.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NEWARK UMC – PHASE A1 RENOVATIONS

Section 283111 – page 6 # 1397 d. Shunt-trip control. e. Elevator AutoSafe control for automatic lowering. f. (1) spare control module.

2.6 WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS

A. All fire alarm cabling shall be:

1. UL listed metal-clad, type MC FPLP, minimum #16 for initiation circuits, shielded as required by the manufacturer.

2. UL listed metal-clad, type MC FPLP, minimum #14 for notification circuits.

3. Where fed underground, run type MC FPLP in raceway.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS:

A. Install wiring, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division-26 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems” for wiring of non-power limited circuits.

B. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring, if installed in conduit, shall be in a completely separate conduit system. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article

760, Power-Limited Protective Signaling Circuits. Use conduits in the exposed and unprotected areas, and only cables rated for use in Environmental Air Plenums.

3.2

C. Install wires and cables without splices. Make connections at terminal strips in cabinets or at equipment terminals. Make soldered splices in electronic circuits in control cabinets.

INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS:

A. Install fire alarm system as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation."

B. Comply with NFPA 72.

C. Wiring: Wiring of fire alarm system is work of this section, but is not specifically detailed on drawings.

1.

2.

Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Color code wiring and install per manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram. Determine exact number of wires for each fire area zone from number and types of devices installed. Connect each device with sufficient wiring to complete its intended operation.

Where there are a number of power requiring devices, such as smoke detectors and fan control relays, installed in a circuit, group in numbers so power required does not exceed 80% of manufacturer's power supply rating. Provide extra wiring, or extra power supplies required to fulfill that requirement. In addition, provide extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops which makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which it was designed. Determine above with manufacturer's representative while equipment is being installed.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Connection and Supervision: Make connections to panel under manufacturer's supervision. Run wiring to main terminal cabinet located adjacent to main fire alarm panel. Complete connections from this cabinet to panel utilizing Manufacturer's technicians.

NEWARK UMC – ADDITIONS & RENOVATIONS DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

____________________________________________________________________________________________

#1397 Section 283111 – page 7

3.4

B. TESTING: The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72 by the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and engineer.

WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial

Completion. Refer to Division 1 specifications for definition of Substantial Completion.

3.5

B. Contractors shall note that all equipment warranties, as described in the various sections of the

Specifications, will begin after Substantial Completion. It will not make any difference when equipment is ordered, delivered or installed, warranties will commence after the Architect issues his letter of

“Substantial Completion.”

DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate the Fire alarm system and train Owner's maintenance personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours on-site training in operation and maintenance.

C. Schedule training with Owner and Engineer with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement